JP7405211B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding slot machines, when the start lever is operated while medals are being bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is carried out, the reels begin to rotate, and the reels stop while they are rotating. When the switch is operated, the reels stop rotating. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the internal lottery result, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention
a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a stop operation means that stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means for performing a lottery for awarding benefits to players based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result is provided. A means for granting benefits that can be granted;
special determination means for executing a special determination of causing a special event advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result;
In a predetermined specific state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, a restriction means capable of restricting execution of the special determination by the special determination means;
In the specific state, if the lottery result by the lottery device is the special result, a specific determination device that performs a specific determination to cause a specific event different from the special event;
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a result corresponding to causing the specific event, means capable of causing the specific event;
Equipped with
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the specific symbol combination can be stopped regardless of the result of the specific determination by the specific determination device;
A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means is provided for setting one of the setting values of the plurality of stages,
The lottery result by the lottery means is configured such that the probability that the lottery result is the special result is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting means,
If the result of the specific determination is a result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event may be caused to occur before the specific state ends. .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal game state. It is a flow chart showing reel control processing. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is an explanatory view for explaining stop control of a reel. 3 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. It is a flowchart which shows bonus state processing. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition relations of each state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes. It is a flowchart which shows lottery result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart showing the first specific combination processing. It is a flowchart showing the second specific combination processing. It is a flowchart showing the third specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode transition notification. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of press order notification. It is a flowchart which shows push order processing. It is a flowchart showing winning result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows the number of games management process. 3 is a flowchart showing end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for specialized zones. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process by the display control apparatus of the sub side. It is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the time of bet. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process at the time of a start. It is a flowchart which shows the press order notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a notification timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at each stop operation. It is a diagram showing the relationship between notification timing and additional effects. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of a full stop. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus notification. It is a flowchart showing specific winning combination notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows continuous production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of continuous performance. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning probability of each role, the winning probability of the attack mode transition lottery, and the set value. It is a flowchart which shows stop information setting processing. It is a diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the presence or absence of restrictions. It is a diagram for explaining changes in the winning mode before and after the transition to the carryover state. It is a diagram for explaining changes in the winning mode before and after the transition to the carryover state. (a) is a flowchart showing the special notification process, and (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the eye push instruction lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of a chance notification effect. It is a diagram showing an example of a comprehensive chance notification effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the white BAR push instruction notification performance and the black BAR push instruction notification performance. In the second embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing point processing upon winning, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a point table. It is a figure showing an example of performance based on point addition processing. It is a figure showing an example of performance based on point addition processing. It is a flowchart which shows stop information setting processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the presence or absence of restrictions. It is a figure showing the relationship between the winning probability of each role, the winning probability of the attack mode transition lottery, and the setting value in the fourth embodiment. It is a diagram showing the relationship between winning modes, presence or absence of restrictions, winning probability, and setting values. It is a flowchart which shows stop information setting processing. It is a figure showing an outline of a winning mode of each role in a 5th embodiment. It is a diagram showing a part of the symbol arrangement of the right reel. It is a flowchart which shows stop information setting processing. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between winning modes, presence or absence of restrictions, winning probability, and setting values in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between winning modes, presence or absence of restrictions, winning probability, and set values in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between winning modes, presence or absence of restrictions, winning probability, and setting values in the eighth embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention applied to a reel-type gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, and specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is the front side. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the door 12 and a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed into a box shape with an open front as a whole, and is attached to so-called island equipment by nailing or the like when installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a, 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game status. Three vertically elongated display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. . Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly explained.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is configured to be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently, by driving each stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to rotate once by applying, for example, a 504-pulse drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as excitation pulse), and this excitation pulse changes the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has rotated once is installed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, the main controller 101 changes the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

A plurality of symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses. In addition, the main controller 101 can grasp the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Control can be performed such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 6 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. This is a number for recognition, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

The symbols include the "red bell" symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), the "white bell" symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and the "1st replay" symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). ), “2nd Replay” symbol (e.g., 6th on left reel 32L), “Red 7” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “Watermelon” symbol (e.g., 8th on left reel 32L) , "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 4th on left reel 32L), "Black BAR" symbol (e.g., 18th on left reel 32L), "White BAR" symbol (e.g., 17th on left reel 32L), "LUCKY" There are 11 types of symbols: ``Youth'' symbol (for example, 5th on the left reel 32L) and ``Youth'' symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that out of 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, only 3 symbols can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are reported using combinations of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, a combination of these three symbols is, for example, by tying the upper symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R as shown in FIG. The combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1, the combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the lower symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol on the right reel 32R, the lower symbol on the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the bending line L6 is a line that bends in the middle when the symbols are lined up. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line other than the bending line L6, but their explanation will be omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, lines that are activated and lines that are not activated are set depending on the number of bets on medals, and when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line, As a result of winning a prize, the player is given a privilege in which a predetermined number of medals as game media are paid out, or a privilege in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on a line that is not activated, no prize is won and the above benefits are not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the downward-sloping line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lines, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4, There are cases where the combination line is an effective line, and cases where only the bending line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when the game is started with 3 medals bet, only the lower right line L4 is considered as the valid line, and when the game is started with 2 medals bet, the lower right line L4 is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are taken as valid lines. Further, when the game is started after one medal is bet, only the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, middle line L2, and right-sloping line L5 are not set as valid lines. Below, a game started with three medals bet is called a 3-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is called a 2-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is called a 2-bet game. Also called a 1-bet game.

FIGS. 9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between symbol combinations that result in winnings and benefits that are awarded in the event of winning.

The small role winnings for which medals are paid out include the 1st small role winning to the 32nd small winning winning.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the active line. If it stops, the first small prize will be awarded. When the first small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 2nd minor prize winning to the 26th minor prize winning, the winning symbol combinations are different, but in a 3 bet game, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M "White BAR" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "White Bell" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol, right reel 32R's "White BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "White Bell" symbol, This is a winning mode in which the "Red 7" symbol or the "Second Replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "Bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L will stop at the top, the "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M will stop at the middle, and the "White BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop at the bottom. If so, it will be the 8th small winning prize. As shown in FIG. 6, on the middle reel 32M, a "red bell" symbol is arranged at a position adjacent to the "cherry" symbol (no. 11) on the upstream side (no. 12), and on the right reel 32R, A "red bell" symbol is placed at a position (number 20) one symbol away from the "white BAR" symbol (number 18) on the upstream side. For this reason, when the 8th small role prize is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th small win is a win determined by the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, the 27th small win is a “cherry” on the left reel 32L. The 27th small winning combination is established when the symbols stop on the upper or lower row. In this case, the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L must be on the top or stop, that is, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol must be on the active line. By stopping, the 27th small role prize is established. When the 27th minor winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbols on the left reel 32L stop on the upper or lower row, and the "cherry" symbols may stop aligned on the downward-rightward line L4. More specifically, the left reel 32L has a "cherry" symbol or a "second replay" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" symbol, a "white bell" symbol, or a "cherry" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a "cherry" symbol. When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the 28th small winning combination is won. In addition, whether or not the 28th small role wins may be determined by the stopped symbols on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M as predetermined reels among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, The 28th small winning combination is established when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M stop on the active line. In this case, the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the symbols stopped on the right reel 32R, the 28th small winning combination is established when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M stop on the active line. When the 29th small winning combination is achieved, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

In addition, to provide a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th minor role and the 28th minor role, when the "Cherry" symbol or the "2nd Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is achieved, depending on the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the 28th minor winning combination may be achieved instead of the 27th minor winning winning. In other words, although the configuration is such that the winning mode for winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode for winning the 28th minor role, winning the 27th minor role and winning the 28th minor role are clearly distinguished when determining the winning. will be held.

The 29th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. In other words, when the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the valid line, the 29th small winning combination is established when the "watermelon" symbols stop aligned downward to the right. When the 29th small winning combination is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, if the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 30th small It will be a prize. In addition, whether or not the 30th small role wins may be determined by the stopped symbols on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M as predetermined reels among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, When the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M stop on the active line, the 30th small winning combination is established. In this case, the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the symbols stopped on the right reel 32R, the 30th minor prize is established when the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M stop on the active line. When the 30th small winning combination is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, "1st Replay" on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "Red Bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "Bell" symbol stops on the activated line, the 31st small role will be won. When the 31st small winning combination is established, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 32nd minor winning combination to the 35th minor winning winning, if the winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, 3 medals will be paid out, and in a 2-bet game, 14 medals will be paid out.

The 36th small prize is won if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. This is a winning mode in which the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the active line, while the "watermelon" symbols on the remaining reels do not stop on the active line, resulting in a so-called watermelon tenpai off-stop roll. When the 36th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, and "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol, "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "Bell" symbol and the "Youth" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small role will be won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "second replay" symbol is arranged at a position adjacent to the "red bell" symbol (number 7) on the downstream side (number 6), and the main "white ``Bell'' symbols (No. 3, 12, 15, 20) and downstream adjacent positions (No. 2, 11, 14, 19) are arranged with ``First Replay'' symbols. On the right reel 32R, the main "Red Bell" symbols (No. 2, 5, 12, 20) and the "1 A "replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol is arranged, and a "first replay" symbol is arranged at a position (number 11) adjacent to the "white bell" symbol (number 10) on the upstream side. For this reason, when the 37th small prize is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are at full strength mainly on the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is The "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol do not stop, resulting in a so-called double tenpai failure. When the 37th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The "Black BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, and "1st Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "1st Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "Watermelon" symbol and the "Black BAR" symbol stop on the active line, the 38th small prize is awarded. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the No. 4 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper row to the lower row, if the 38th minor prize is established, the left The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the middle line L2. When the 38th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, He won the 39th small role prize. Although the details will be described later, the 39th small winning combination is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 39th small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out.

When the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, This is the 40th small role prize. Although details will be described later, the 40th small winning combination is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 40th small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out.

If the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol or "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 41st small It will be a prize. When the 41st small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

In addition, the winning mode is set by a small number (1 or 2) of symbols placed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and basically the 42nd small is a winning pattern that is difficult to stop when aiming to win a prize. A role to the 44th minor role is set. These are the winning combinations that are set in order for the gaming machine to distinguish between the winning combinations when setting overlapping combinations of small winning combinations. For the 42nd small role as control role 1, a winning is achieved when the "Youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. do. In addition, the 43rd small role as control role 2 is won when the "Youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "White BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. holds true. For the 44th small role as control role 3, a winning is achieved when the "Youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. do. When the winning of the 42nd minor combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game. On the other hand, when the winning of the 43rd minor winning combination or the 44th minor winning combination is achieved, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Prizes for which a replay benefit that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals include the 1st replay win to the 8th replay win. Furthermore, if the second re-game winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, and if the third re-gaming winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-gaming win is achieved. If a winning or a fifth re-game winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. The 1st re-game winning to 8th re-gaming winning is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game.

State transition winnings in which only a gaming state transition is performed include a 1st BB winning, a 2nd BB winning, and a CB winning.

If the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, it will be the 1st BB prize, and if the "White BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line He won the 2nd BB prize. When these BB wins are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. In addition, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "watermelon" symbol, the "first replay" symbol, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol and stops on the active line, it becomes a CB win. If a CB win is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although different from winning, there is a stop result in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, and the "white BAR" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "white bell" symbol, and "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Also, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, and "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. , "Red 7" symbol, and "Second Replay" symbol stop on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combination of the above symbols will be referred to as a transition roll.

At the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to a main control device 101, which will be described later. The main controller 101 then recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output LOW detection signals, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 recognizes the switching of the signals and recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reels corresponding to the operated switches to stop rotating.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped. In this case, the right reel 32R stops rotating. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal slot 45 involves an operation in which the player directly inserts medals, it can be said that the medal slot 45 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back side of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided from a medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 to a medal receiving tray 50 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The dispensing device 53 discharges the medals into an opening 48a provided in the discharging passage 48 by rotating a medal dispensing rotating plate (not shown), and dispensing the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 via the discharging passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a reserve tank 54 is provided to avoid storing more than a predetermined amount of medals in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored at a level higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals stuck in the selector 46 are removed. It is designed to be returned through a discharge port 49.

At the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, a first credit input switch 56 is provided for inputting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. Further, a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit input switch 56, and a third credit input switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56. The second credit input switch 57 is for inputting one virtual medal, and the third credit input switch 58 is for inputting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit input switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting game media together with the medal input slot 45. Also, it should be noted that whereas the medal slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit input switches 56 to 58 only involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

A performance switch 66 is provided between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, which is operated when a performance occurs. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided on the left side of the production switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided on the right side of the production switch 66. There is.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment switch 59 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, if we focus on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout number that displays the remaining number of medals that will be paid out before the BB state ends. A display section 61 and a payout number display section 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are constructed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display section 62, a press order notification section 68 is provided to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. . The press order notification section 68 is composed of three LED lamps corresponding to the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44, respectively. Note that the press order notification unit 68 can also be replaced with a liquid crystal display, etc., and an LED lamp may be provided inside the stop switches 42 to 44 so that the stop switches 42 to 44 emit light, or .about.44 may be provided with LED lamps adjacent to each of them.

At the top of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that play various sound effects and notify the player of the game status as the game progresses. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for providing various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be based on the main display section, in this embodiment, It is called an auxiliary display section 65. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 is provided on the back side of the auxiliary display section 65.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 therein, and also includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set by a hall manager or the like inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on. Note that the reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 is attached to the housing 11 for overall management of the game.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the input switch 58, a payment detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the payment switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted and turned on are connected, and signals from these various sensors are outputted to the CPU 102 via an input/output port 104. It has become.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply section 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the state of power interruption and generates a power failure signal not only in the event of a power outage but also in the event of power interruption by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, which in this example is 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. It is configured so that a power outage signal is output. The power outage signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 executes power outage processing to be described later by recognizing this power outage signal. Further, this power outage signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. The time during which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for the main controller 101 to perform power outage processing.

On the output side of the main control device 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit card The input/output port 104 includes a display section 60, a remaining payout number display section 61, a payout number display section 62, a press order notification section 68, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. connected via.

The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106, which is not shown, as is well known, there are various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing lottery results of winning combinations, and stop information used to control the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to a stop information storage area 106b for storing game conditions such as a BB state, a state information storage area 106c for storing game states such as BB state, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff (including power cutoff due to operation of the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Yes, when the power outage is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is turned off by power outage processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed during the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power outage flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181, which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. It has built-in RAM 183 for securing the memory.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), and the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 serves as a sub-platform that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main platform that centrally manages the games. That is, by providing a sub-board for audio, lamps, and displays related to indirect games, the burden on the main board is reduced.

A production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. Note that the various display sections 60 to 62 and 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be explained. The processing of the CPU 102 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power outage signal sent to the NMI terminal. There is also an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of . Below, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 14 to 41.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main controller 101, and the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing to be described later are saved to the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, an outline of the power outage process will be explained.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power failure signal is input, the main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power outage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, by calculating a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved and storing it in a backup area, subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In addition, considering the case where the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, for example, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not output, it means that the power outage has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power outage signal continues to be output, an infinite loop will continue. Incidentally, even under an infinite loop, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, the process moves to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor, which is the respective drum drive motor. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read results are normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to transmit various commands such as a lottery result command to be described later to the display control device 81. In step S111, segment data setting processing is performed to set segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, remaining payout number display section 61, and payout number display section 62, respectively. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to each of the display sections 60 to 62 and corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. are displayed. In step S113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are restored to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing is ended.

Next, the normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 15.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like complete initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, etc.) are cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any re-game winnings were achieved in the previous game. If any re-game winning is established, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically input virtual medals of the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, when a re-play winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and when a re-play winning is achieved in a 1-bet game, one virtual medal is inserted. Performs processing to automatically insert medals. By the way, in this embodiment, re-play winnings are not established in 2-bet games, but if it is modified so that re-play winnings are established in 2-bet games, 2 coins will be generated in this automatic insertion process. It is recommended that the virtual medals can be automatically inserted.

In addition, in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without subtracting the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60. In other words, if any re-game winning is achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If any re-gaming winnings have not been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated or not, and when the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of virtual medals as the credited virtual medals. I do.

After the end of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals were inserted or credit input switches 56 to 58 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one of them is performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process is ended. Furthermore, if neither medals nor credit input switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After the start waiting process ends, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of bets for medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number of CB states, and gaming states other than the CB state (specifically, normal gaming state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB "1" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the state). In other words, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "2", and in other than the CB state, the condition is that the number of bets is "1" or "3". An affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if no medals have been bet, or if a bet has been made but the number of bets is "2", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and among the processes, the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such transition notification processing will be explained in detail later.

After performing the process in step S206, a bet command including information on the process result in step S206 and information on the number of bets for which an affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. Set as the output target. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described in detail later.

After executing the process in step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, the configuration is such that the game can be started if the start lever 41 is operated under a situation where a specified number of medals have been bet. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, a valid line setting process is performed in which the combination line corresponding to the bet number is set as the valid line. That is, in a 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an active line, and in a 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as active lines. Furthermore, in a 1-bet game, the bending line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S210, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a de-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the RT status process in step S214, and the bonus status process in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 16.

In step S301, a random number to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination is acquired. This slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table is selected for determining the validity of the winning combination. This slot machine 10 has six gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. Each is set for each gaming state.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. . For example, if the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state, and the lottery table for the normal gaming state is set. select. In addition, in this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set which winning probability is based on which internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the process related to setting the probability of winning.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process that is started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on with the setting key detection sensor 73a detecting that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on. Started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value is changed from "setting 1" to "setting 2". The setting values are updated as follows: → "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Note that each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, based on the setting key detection sensor 73a being turned off, the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process ends. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display on the credit display section 60 also ends. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored setting values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for the normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state of "Setting 3". Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, the determination value DV used for determining the validity of the winning combination is set. In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In addition, in the first judgment value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV, 1, and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value, and a new value is set. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid or not. In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If the number exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not one of the first BB, second BB, and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an affirmative determination was made in step S305 for the index value IV (IV=35 to 51) that includes any one of the first BB, second BB, and CB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S306, processing is performed to set the corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306, or after the process in step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each minor role corresponding to the index value IV that was affirmatively determined in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=35, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd minor winning flag, and the 33rd minor winning flag are set in step S308. 35 Set the small winning winning flag. Further, when the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=16, a winning flag indicating that the 30th minor prize and the 41st minor prize have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB was won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB was winning (second BB winning flag), the winning flag is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set ends (see S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset with one of the conditions being that the corresponding winning has been achieved. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games.

In addition, in steps S306 to S308 in a state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the 1st BB, If a winning combination other than the second BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=35 in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, the 1st BB winning flag is not set and the 28th minor winning flag is set. , the 33rd small winning combination winning flag, and the 35th small winning winning flag are set. In addition, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 36 while the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, the 2nd BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd The small winning combination winning flag and the 35th small winning winning flag are set.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S309, and in the subsequent step S310, it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used to judge the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV. By the way, when determining the validity of the winning combination using the lottery table shown in Figure 17, the probability of winning in the normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/7.3, which is the probability of winning in the strong cherry. The probability of winning 1 or strong cherry 2 (probability of winning when IV = 13, 14) is approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 15) is approximately 1/183. The probability of winning a strong watermelon 1 to 3 (probability of winning when IV = 16 to 18) is approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 19) is approximately 1/218, the probability of winning chance A (probability of winning when IV = 20) is approximately 1/252, and the probability of winning chance B (probability of winning when IV = 21) probability) is approximately 1/252. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 22) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning the no question bell (probability of winning when IV = 23) is approximately 1 in 65,500. It is 1. The probability of winning the sequential push bell 1, the sequential push bell 2, the pinch push bell 1, and the pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 24 to 27) is approximately 1/43.7, respectively, and the middle push bell 1. The probability of winning for middle push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=28 to 31) is about 1/21.8. The probability of winning Strong Cherry Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is approximately 1/1770, and the probability of winning Strong Cherry Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is approximately 1/1770. Approximately 1/4680, the probability of winning weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is approximately 1/3280, probability of winning weak cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 38) The probability of winning is approximately 1/6550. The probability of winning strong watermelon stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is approximately 1/3280, and the probability of winning strong watermelon stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 340) is approximately 1/3280. Approximately 1/6550. The probability of winning weak watermelon stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 41) is approximately 1/13100, and the probability of winning weak watermelon stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 42) is approximately 1/13100. Approximately 1/6550. The probability of winning in Chance A overlap 1, Chance A overlap 2, Chance B overlap 1, and Chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=43 to 46) is approximately 1/3280. The probability of winning middle bell duplication 1 and middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV=47, 48) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning the 1st BB and the 2nd BB alone (probability of winning when IV=49, 50) is about 1/65,500, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=51) is approximately 1/19.9. Furthermore, the probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/1.96.

Note that in the normal gaming state lottery table, 0 is set for the point values PV of IV=2 to 12, 32 to 34, and 52 to 55. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, winnings cannot be won at these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or if it is determined in step S310 that there is no object to be judged, it means that the judgment of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, the process advances to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S312, lottery result handling processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S311, processing for notifying the winning combination, etc. are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process in step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand the result of determining whether the winning combination is correct or not. However, in the normal process, various commands such as the above lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no commands are transmitted to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, a stop information setting process is executed to set stoppable symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. The stop information setting process will be explained in detail later.

In the following step S315, when a plurality of stoppable symbol information is set in step S314, a priority setting process is executed to set the priority order. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor role, replay, and bonus roles have been won, the following priority order is set. The priority order is set so that when a small winning combination and a bonus are won, the small winning combination is established with priority, and so that when the small winning combination cannot be achieved, a bonus winning is established. When winning a re-game and a bonus, a priority order is set so that the re-game winning is established with priority. After executing the process of step S315, the lottery process ends.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 18.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation performance process is a process for performing a performance using reel control during the invalid period based on the results of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if it has not elapsed, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and motor control initialization processing is performed to set rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a predetermined rotational speed, and the rotation start process ends. Furthermore, when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. Notify players, etc.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. do. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand which stop switch was operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reels.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol. If they are equal, reel stop processing to stop the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop roll of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, if you win when IV=24 to 31, that is, sequential push bell 1, sequential push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command are activated. A second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning mode established depending on the order of operations.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. For example, if the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the second minor role win, the seventh minor role win, or the ninth minor role win is established. Then, the stop information is set so that the first minor prize is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the second minor prize is established when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. The stop information is set so that the winning part or the 9th small winning part is achieved. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly explained. In this slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state in the normal game mode, after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid by a maximum of 4 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, It can be stopped, and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as a valid line. Therefore, if the same type of symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol will be activated when it becomes a winning symbol regardless of the timing of operating the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with regard to the symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by five or more symbols, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in order to stop the symbols on the active line.

An example will be explained in which the middle press bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in the order. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in order to achieve the second minor prize winning, the seventh minor prize winning, or the ninth minor prize winning.

The second small role symbols on the left reel 32L are a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as the seventh minor role symbol, and also have a function as the ninth minor role symbol. The left reel 32L is arranged such that the interval between the second small role symbols (the seventh minor role symbols, the ninth minor role symbols) is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped at the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the No. 4 "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L has reached the middle row, the No. 7 "Red Bell" symbol will appear as shown in FIG. 20(a). The pattern stops at the top. As a result, there remains room for winning the second minor role, winning the seventh minor role, or winning the ninth minor role on the downward-sloping line L4.

The second small role symbol on the middle reel 32M is a “white BAR” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol is placed only at the 18th position. Furthermore, the seventh small role symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "Red 7" symbol is placed only at the 14th position. The 9th small winning symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol is placed only at the 11th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small role symbol, the seventh minor role symbol, or the ninth minor role symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor role symbol, the seventh minor role symbol, or the ninth minor role symbol may stop on the active line. None of the 9th small winning symbols may stop on the active line.

Specifically, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the "1st Replay" symbol No. 13 to the "1st Replay" symbol No. 17 has reached the lower row, the second small role The "white BAR" symbol stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination to be realized on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the "Second Replay" symbol No. 9 to the "First Replay" symbol No. 13 has reached the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20(b), , the ``Red 7'' symbol, which is the 7th small winning symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the seventh small winning combination to be realized on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "white bell" symbol to the 10th "young man" symbol reaches the bottom row, the 9th small role symbol "cherry" symbol will be moved to the middle row. Stop at. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any other timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after sliding for 4 symbols, the 2nd small role symbol, the 7th minor role symbol, and the 9th minor role symbol will be changed. Cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the number 2 "LUCKY" symbol or the number 6 "white bell" symbol stops at the middle stage.

When the 7th small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the 7th small role winning can be realized.

The 7th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a “white bell” symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" symbol is placed only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the "1st Replay" symbol No. 6 to the "White Bell" symbol No. 10 has reached the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20(c). As shown in , the "white bell" symbol, which is the 7th small role symbol, stops at the lower row. As a result, the 7th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the No. 3 "Second Replay" symbol has reached the bottom row, the No. 4 "Watermelon" symbol will be displayed as shown in FIG. 20(d). Stop at the bottom. The combination of the "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 11.

When the 9th small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the 9th small role winning can be realized.

The 9th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a “Youth” symbol. On the right reel 32R, a "youth" symbol is placed at the 15th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the "1st Replay" symbol No. 11 to the "Youth" symbol No. 15 has reached the lower stage, the 9th small role symbol will be selected. The "Youth" design stops at the bottom. As a result, the 9th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 11.

When the second small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the second small role winning can be realized.

The second small role symbol on the right reel 32R is the “white BAR” symbol. On the right reel 32R, a "white BAR" symbol is placed at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "Watermelon" symbol to the 18th "White BAR" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small role symbol " The "White BAR" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "white BAR" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 11.

If the 2nd small role symbol, 7th minor role symbol, and 9th minor role symbol on the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped at the lower stage.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped at the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation. From the left, the combinations of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "LUCKY" symbol ("white bell" symbol), and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) transition as shown in Figure 11. It's a good result.

In this way, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the second minor prize winning will be established, and the seventh minor prize will be won. There are three cases: a winning is achieved, a ninth minor role winning is successful, and a transitional number is stopped.

Next, an example will be explained in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the first small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "red bell" symbols, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol stops at the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are first minor prize symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the first minor prize symbols is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the second time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped on the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, which are the first minor prize symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the first minor prize symbols is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated thirdly, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped at the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the first small winning combination is achieved regardless of the timing of the operation.

If the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation orders, the first small role prize will be established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established, or the transition number will stop on the active line. By the way, if you win the middle bell, you will win the 38th small role regardless of the operation order and timing, and if you win the no-questions-asked bell, you will win the 38th small role regardless of the operation order and operation timing. 1 small win prize is established.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process that sets the number of medals to be paid out, with one condition being that the winning symbol combinations are lined up on the active line. In the payout determination process, the combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped at the bottom of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning has been achieved on the active line. judge. If the winning combination is established, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result corresponding process, processing for shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result corresponding process will be explained in detail later.

After performing the winning result corresponding process, in step S415, a winning result command is set to cause the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is ended.

Next, an outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be explained.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0 or not. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a small winning combination has not been achieved. In such a case, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether any of the first to eighth replay winnings has been achieved. If any replay winnings have not been achieved, the medal payout process is immediately terminated, and if any replay winnings have been achieved, a replay setting process is performed to change the gaming state to the replaying state. , ends the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) explained earlier, when it is determined that the current gaming state is a re-gaming state, automatic insertion processing is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is It is displayed on the credit display section 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. The medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 via the outlet 49. In addition, in the medal payout process, processing is also performed to change the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. In addition, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61 is subtracted. .

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 21.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition number has stopped on the active line. If the transition number has stopped, the process advances to step S502, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S501 that the transition roll has not stopped on the active line, the process advances to step S504, and the second re-game winning is determined based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether it is established. If the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process ends. In addition, if the rolled number stops moving on the active line under a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the process returns to step S503. Then, the first RT setting flag is set, and this process ends.

If the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the normal gaming state (see FIG. 17), the first RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 55 is equal to each winning probability in the normal gaming state, and the probability of winning when IV = 1 The probability of winning is approximately 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1/32.8. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if you win when IV=1, it will be a normal replay win, and if you win when IV=2, it will be a first promotion replay 1 win, and IV If you win when IV = 3, you will win 1st promotion replay 2, if you win when IV = 4, you will win 1st promotion replay 3, and if you win when IV = 5, you will win 1st promotion replay 3. In this case, you will win the 1st promotion replay 4. The probability of winning when IV=1 to 5 is approximately 1/7.30. The normal replay winning probability under normal gaming conditions is also approximately 1/7.30. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, each role type of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as in the normal gaming state, and the winning mode will be such that the replay benefit is granted. changes to something different from the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state is realized, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-gaming winning, the third re-gaming prize that shifts to the second RT state is realized. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated not only when the above-mentioned push order bell is won but also when the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won. Stop information is set in order to change the winning mode achieved depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. If you win the first promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, unlike the case where you win the push order bell, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay prize or The third re-game winning is guaranteed. For 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, the 3rd replay is associated with one of the 6 operation orders, and the 1st replay is associated with the other operation orders. It is attached.

In addition, in the first promoted replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, seventh replay, and eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th re-game to 8th re-game are not associated with any of the above six operation orders. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth regames, even if the first promotion replays 2 to 4 are won, no prize is won regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is assigned the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is assigned the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, the 1st promoted replay 3 is distributed with the 7th replay in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and the 1st promoted replay 4 is distributed. Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, no matter which of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replay is the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations for achieving the third replay win. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation order corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally achieved. This is because it may be possible to do so. Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship between first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other duplicate roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third re-game winning is established. If the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the process ends. do.

If the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the second RT state lottery table is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the first RT state lottery table (see FIG. 22), the second RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV=11 to 55 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and the probability of winning when IV=1 The probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1/13.2, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is approximately 1/10.5 and IV = 9. , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1/7.00. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/150. That is, when moving to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first replay win that does not shift the gaming state, the second replay win that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth replay win that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth replay win that shifts to the third RT state. A prize is awarded.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-mentioned first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and Even when winning the 2 promotion replay 2, stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. In the case of a win in Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3, the first re-game win or the second re-game win is always achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. If you win the 2nd promotion replay 1, regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, either the 1st replay win, the 4th replay win, or the 5th replay win will always be achieved. . If the second promotion replay 2 is won, the first replay win or the fourth replay win will definitely be achieved regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In addition, the number attached to the fourth re-game in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth re-game winning is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in a winning combination, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when winning the second promotion replay 1, the winning symbol combination will stop and the fourth replay winning will be established, or the red 7 - Red 7/Black BAR The symbol combination that stops in the middle row stops and the 4th re-game winning is established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-gaming winning has been achieved. If the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-gaming winning have not been achieved, the process is immediately terminated. If the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. Then, this process ends.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the third RT state lottery table is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a third RT state lottery table selected in the third RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the second RT state lottery table (see FIG. 24), the third RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 55 is equal to the probability of winning each in the second RT state, and the probability of winning when IV = 9, 10 When IV=11 and 12, the probability of winning is approximately 1/7.00. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/150. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and the prize winning mode in which the replay benefit is granted. changes to a state different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state and the 2nd re-gaming winning that moves to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state, and the 6th re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state. The 7th re-game win, the 8th re-game win, and the 3rd re-game win that moves to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), even if a prize is won in BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2, the winning mode that is achieved is changed depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command. Set the stop information accordingly.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. If you win BAR Replay 1, regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will receive either the 1st replay win, 6th replay win, 7th replay win, or 3rd replay win. always holds true. If you win BAR Replay 2, regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will receive either the 1st replay win, 6th replay win, 8th replay win, or 3rd replay win. always holds true.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 26.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not a bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether any one of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process advances to step S603, and it is determined whether or not a CB winning combination has been achieved based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB win is established, a CB setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter provided in the status information storage area 106c for counting the remaining number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state. By performing the processing of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly explained.

The "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol, "1st Replay" symbol, or "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R. If , stops on the active line, it will be a CB win. The CB symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, if a CB is won, the CB is won regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The main control device 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of the normal process, it is determined whether the number of bets on medals has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the effective line setting process (step S209), the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are determined. Set as the valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the CB state lottery table is omitted, in the CB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV = 1 to 51, and "16384" is set as the point value PV for IV = 52 to 55. is set (see FIG. 17 etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small/medium winning combination 1 (probability of winning when IV=52) is approximately 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small/medium winning combination 2 (IV=53). The probability of winning when IV = 54) is approximately 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB Small and Medium Role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 54) is approximately 1/4.00, The probability of winning the small/medium winning combination 4 (probability of winning when IV=55) is about 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, even if you win any of CB small/medium winnings 1 to CB small/medium winnings 4, any small winning will occur regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, if you win the 1st minor role, 27th minor role, 31st minor role, 36th minor role to 38th minor role win, you will receive 15 medals. If a payout is made and the 2nd minor role winning ~ 26th minor role winning, 28th minor role winning ~ 30th minor role winning, 32nd minor role winning ~ 35th minor role winning, 14 pieces Medals are paid out. In other words, when transitioning to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a gaming state, there is a single bonus (SB) that allows you to play one game (JAC game) as a winning combination, and a single bonus winning (winning). ) may be provided.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB win has not been established, this means that a bonus win flag other than CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning has been achieved.

If any BB winning is achieved, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, a process is performed in which 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is ended on the condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value have been paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for the BB state is selected. .

FIG. 28 is a BB state lottery table that is selected in the BB state to which the game transitions at the first BB or the second BB. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 31 and 35 to 55, and "21845" is set as the point value for IV=32 to 34. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning BB small/medium winning combination 1 (probability of winning when IV=32) is approximately 1/3.00, and the probability of winning BB small/medium winning combination 2 (IV=33). The probability of winning when IV=34) is approximately 1/3.00, and the probability of winning BB small and medium winning combination 3 (probability of winning when IV=34) is approximately 1/3.00. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/65,500.

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. As mentioned above, the first small winning combination is a winning mode that can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, even if you win any of the BB small/medium winnings 1, BB small/medium winnings 2, or BB small/medium winnings 3, regardless of the operating order and timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will win the first small winning, Either the 39th small role winning or the 40th small role winning will definitely be achieved. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, nine medals are paid out when the first minor prize winning, the 39th minor prize winning, and the 40th minor prize winning are established. Since the probability of losing in the BB state is approximately 1/65,500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and any BB winning is established, a process of setting a carryover command is performed in step S613. The carryover command is a command that is sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it aware that the bonus prize has not been won in the bonus winning game and a so-called carryover state has occurred. In the command output process (step S110), the command is output to the display control device 81.

Here, in this embodiment, in a game played in a carryover state, winning of other bonuses is restricted. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal gaming state (Figure 17), if you win a combination of bonuses (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) with IV = 35 to 51, etc., the winning combination will correspond to these bonuses. The winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, if you win a winning combination with IV=35 to 48, the winning flags for each of these small winning combinations will be set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus will not be set, and the winning flag for each small winning combination will be set. Only winnings will be valid. In other words, the carryover state can also be said to be a state in which bonus drawings are restricted.

When the gaming state shifts to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether the value of the remaining payout number counter has become 0 or not, and when it has become 0, a process of clearing the CB setting flag or BB setting flag is performed. Furthermore, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag is set indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game. Note that the termination determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game returns to the gaming state when the CB winning was achieved. For example, if a CB winning is achieved under the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is returned to after the CB state ends, and if a CB winning is achieved under the 3rd RT state, the 3rd RT state is returned after the CB state ends. to return to. On the other hand, if the first BB or second BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB winning is achieved under the second RT state, the game will shift to the normal gaming state. Incidentally, in the case of transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. In the case of transition to the BB state, the player can expect an increase in medals by approximately 144 (=9×24−3×24) until the BB state ends.

If none of the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, or CB winning flag is set (if step S602 is NO), or the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, or CB winning flag is not established and the winning is carried over. When a command is set (when the process in step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in steps S605 and S612, and when the end determination process is performed in step S614, In step S606, a status command is set. Here, the status command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the gaming status at the end of the game (that is, the gaming status of the next game), and in step S606, the status information storage area The state command corresponding to the configuration flag set in 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, an external signal setting process is performed to set an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10. After that, this process ends.

<Overview of gaming state transitions and display modes>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be explained using FIG. 29. Note that illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the gaming state is the BB state, when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, the BB state ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the transition rolled number stops on the active line, and the gaming state shifts to the BB state when the BB winning is established. The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In the lottery process using the normal game state lottery table, the first promoted replays 1 to 4, which trigger the transition to the second RT state, and the second promoted replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the third RT state, are not won. Therefore, there is no transition from the normal gaming state to the second RT state or third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third replay win is achieved when you win any of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(a)). . In the lottery process using the first RT state lottery table, the second promoted replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the third RT state, are not won, so the first RT state does not transition to the third RT state.

In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state will shift to the normal gaming state, and each 1BB winning flag will be set. When the corresponding BB winning is achieved in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. There is no transition to the third RT state from the first RT state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-gaming win or the fifth re-gaming winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transferred number stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay win and the fifth replay win are achieved when you win the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (Fig. 23(b) )reference). The second re-game winning is achieved when one of the falling replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When a corresponding BB prize is established in a game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the third RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transferred number stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is achieved when the player wins BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 and operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(c)). The second re-game winning is achieved when one of the falling replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state and each BB winning flag is set. When a corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

In this slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages six types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. The main controller 101 manages five types of display modes: , attack mode, VB mode (including additional specialized zone), and BB mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing transitions between display modes.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB win or the second BB win is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When transitioning from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, a lottery to transition to the challenge mode and a lottery to transition to the attack mode are performed in the BB mode. If the lottery to enter the attack mode is won, the game shifts to the attack mode after the BB mode ends, and if the lottery to go to the challenge mode is won, the game shifts to the challenge mode after the BB mode ends. If no one wins in any transition lottery, the mode transitions to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. If the attack mode is changed to the BB mode, the attack mode is returned to after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is changed to the BB mode, the VB mode is returned to after the BB mode ends.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order replay") is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery to transition to challenge mode and a lottery to transition to attack mode are performed. If the lottery to enter the challenge mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the challenge mode, and if the lottery to enter the attack mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the attack mode. There is no transition to VB mode from normal mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each gaming state of a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won or when the push order replay is won, so it is rare for the stop switches 42 to 44 to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. This almost corresponds to the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state, you can expect that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the 2nd RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The challenge mode, like the normal mode, is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. In challenge mode, a lottery will be held to switch to attack mode. However, the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to attack mode in the normal mode. In other words, although the challenge mode is not notified of the order of operations like the normal mode, it is set as a mode in which it is easy to transition to the attack mode. If you win the lottery to shift to attack mode, you shift from challenge mode to attack mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times, etc.) without winning the transition lottery, the challenge mode is transitioned to the normal mode. Does not shift to VB mode from challenge mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the challenge mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced when the press order replay is won, so it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state and 3rd RT state, which almost corresponds to the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state. I will do it. In challenge mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, you can expect that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time you play one game, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, 1st attack mode to 4th attack mode, which have different probabilities of transitioning to VB mode, and in any attack mode, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher than that of normal mode. The transition probability is high. If the lottery to shift to VB mode is won, the mode shifts from attack mode to VB mode. Transition to VB mode If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, etc.) without winning a lottery, the game shifts from attack mode to normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set to have different probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for switching to VB mode is set so that the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode is the highest in the fourth attack mode and the lowest in the first attack mode. , the third attack mode, and the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so the player can press the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. 44 corresponds almost to the second RT state. In attack mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state, you can expect to increase the number of medals by approximately 0.61 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the 2nd RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the attack mode.

The VB mode, like the attack mode, is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The difference between VB mode and attack mode is that if you win 2nd promotion replay 1 or 2nd promotion replay 2, in attack mode you will be notified of the order of operations to make the 1st replay win. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is notified (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in VB mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be announced and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 will be won. If this happens, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is announced. Therefore, the VB mode almost corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In VB mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, you can expect the medals to increase by about 0.61 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues for at least 25 games after the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

To explain the transition of display modes when the number of medals owned by a player increases, the general flow is from normal mode to challenge mode, from challenge mode to attack mode, and from attack mode to normal mode. . In attack mode, a lottery to enter VB mode is held, so if a loop occurs in which the player moves from attack mode to VB mode and returns from VB mode to attack mode, the player expects to increase the number of medals he owns. can.

As mentioned above, when comparing the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery for switching to the attack mode is set to be higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the attack mode is expected.

Furthermore, in the attack mode, a first attack mode to a fourth attack mode are set, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is different in each attack mode. When shifting from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, the mode basically shifts to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the second attack mode is held. If you win the lottery for transitioning to the second attack mode, you will transition to the second attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to the VB mode will increase. In the second attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the third attack mode is held. If you win the lottery for transition to the third attack mode, you will transition to the third attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode will increase. In the third attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the fourth attack mode is held. If you win the lottery for transitioning to the fourth attack mode, you will transition to the fourth attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when transitioning to attack mode, the attack mode is promoted from 1st attack mode → 2nd attack mode → 3rd attack mode → 4th attack mode, increasing the probability of transitioning to VB mode and attacking A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, the present slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of medals he owns in each display mode of attack mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, the configuration is such that a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state change back and forth depending on the winning of each re-game or the stoppage of a transition roll. As described above, depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or the push order bell is won, the corresponding replay win is established or the transition roll is stopped. Furthermore, in the attack mode or the VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the order of operations that will make it possible to achieve the first small winning combination is announced, so that an increase in owned medals can be expected.

The configuration regarding the display mode will be explained below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. Below, they will be explained in order.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
The process (1) related to the display mode transition lottery is performed in the lottery result corresponding process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

In step S701, the current lottery results are strong cherries 1 and 2, weak cherries, strong watermelons 1 to 3, weak watermelons, chance A, B, and middle bell, strong cherries overlap 1 and 2, weak cherries overlap 1 and 2, Strong watermelon overlap 1, 2, weak watermelon overlap 1, 2, chance A overlap 1, 2, chance B overlap 1, 2, middle bell overlap 1, 2 (for example, see Figure 17, IV = 13-22, 35-48 , hereinafter, these winning combinations are collectively referred to as a "specific winning combination"). If the lottery result is a specific winning combination, it is determined in step S702 whether any of the bonus winning flags among the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag is set. If none of the bonus winning flags are set, that is, if the winning is not a specific winning combination that results in a duplicate winning with the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, or if the winning is a specific winning combination that does not result in a duplicate winning in a situation where there is no carryover status. In step S703 to step S709, processing for switching the display mode based on the specific combination is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination has not been won, or if the bonus winning flag is set in step S702, processing for transitioning to the display mode, etc. is performed in steps S710 to S713.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S701 that a specific winning combination has been won, and if it is determined in step S702 that the bonus winning flag is not set, the current gaming state is determined in step S703. It is determined whether the game is in the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined in step S704 whether or not an attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the attack mode transition lottery is won, and is cleared when transitioning to the attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S704, a first specific combination process is executed in step S705.

<First specific combination processing>
The first specific combination processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

Here, the case where the first specific combination processing is performed is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, and the state where the attack mode has not been won. The display mode in this case corresponds to normal mode or challenge mode. In the first specific combination processing, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to challenge mode, and a transition lottery is also conducted to determine whether to transition to attack mode. Further, in the first specific combination processing, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, processing for adding on the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether the current display mode is in challenge mode. The case of not being in challenge mode means that the current display mode is normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a chance mode table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for attack mode lottery in step S803. In the normal table and the chance mode table, the probability of transition to attack mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries 1 and 2 and weak cherries, the probability of transitioning to attack mode is set higher for strong cherries 1 and 2 than for weak cherries. Additionally, the probability of transitioning to attack mode is different between the normal table and the chance mode table, with the chance mode table having a higher probability of transitioning to attack mode than the normal table. It is set as follows.

After acquiring the attack mode transition lottery table in step S802 or step S803, attack mode lottery processing is executed in step S804. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803, thereby performing a lottery to enter the attack mode.

In step S805, based on the processing result of step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to attack mode has been won. If the lottery for entering the attack mode is won, a process of setting an attack mode winning flag is performed in step S806.

In the following step S807, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set. Step S807 is a process for determining whether simultaneous winning of bonus and attack mode has occurred. In this embodiment, since it is set so that there is no simultaneous winning of the bonus and attack mode, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). Therefore, the first specific combination processing is not executed. That is, in this embodiment, step S807 always makes a negative determination. Note that if the configuration is such that simultaneous winning of the bonus and the attack mode can occur, it is preferable that the processing equivalent to the processing from step S808 onward is performed after the bonus ends. In the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing, other processing (step S815, step S819, The same applies to steps S906, S916, and S1003).

If a negative determination is made in step S807, a lottery process for the number of portent games is performed in step S808. Here, in the present embodiment, when a lottery to shift to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode is won as a lottery to shift display mode, the notification that the lottery to shift to that transition lottery has been won is sent after passing through the omen mode. It will be done. Therefore, the game that won the transition lottery may be different from the game that will notify you that you have won the transition lottery, and the game that won the transition lottery and the game that will notify you that you have won the transition lottery may be different. , is set as a precursor mode.

As the number of precursor games, 1 to 32 games are set, and in step S808, one of these 1 to 32 games is randomly determined by lottery. Note that the number of precursor games to be selected may be set to vary depending on the specific combination that triggered the winning of the attack mode or the gaming state. This also applies to other lottery processes for the number of portent games.

In step S809, based on the processing result of step S808, processing is performed to input the number of precursor games into the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter becomes 0, it is announced that the omen mode has ended and that the transition lottery has been won.

In step S810, processing is executed to set the precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device. The omen command includes information on the lottery result that triggered the omen mode (the display mode to which the display mode shifts after the omen mode, in the case of step S810, the attack mode) and the number of omen games. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S810, the first specific combination process ends.

Further, if the bonus winning flag is set in step S807, the first specific combination processing is ended without setting the number of portent games or the like. As already explained, when the bonus winning flag is set, in a configuration where it is possible to win the transition lottery for attack mode with a combination of combinations with the bonus (strong cherry duplication 1, 2, etc.), a player wins the transition lottery. This is the case. In this case, priority is given to the BB mode rather than the attack mode as the display mode transition destination.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for entering the attack mode has not been won, the process advances to step S811. In step S811, challenge mode lottery processing is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a table for the challenge mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the challenge mode lottery table, the probability of transition to challenge mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries 1 and 2 and weak cherries, the probability of transitioning to the challenge mode is set higher for strong cherries 1 and 2 than for weak cherries.

Cases in which step S811 is implemented include a case where the display mode is challenge mode, but in this case also, challenge mode lottery processing is executed in step S811, and the lottery table is common for both normal mode and challenge mode. It's a table. Note that, as in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in progress.

In step S812, it is determined whether the challenge mode has been won based on the processing result of step S811. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If the mode is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, in step S814, a process is executed to set a challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106.

In the following step S815, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the first specific combination processing is directly ended. If not set, in step S816, a lottery process for the number of portent games is executed, in step S817, a process for setting the number of portent games in the portent counter is executed, and in step S818, a process for setting a portent command is executed. After that, the first specific combination processing is ended. The processing from step S815 to step S818 corresponds to step S807 to step S810.

If it is determined in step S813 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, then in steps S819 to S823, processing for adding on to the continuation game of the challenge mode is performed. That is, in step S819, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S820, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the term "additional" refers to adding the number of consecutive games in challenge mode or attack mode, and the number of additional games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of consecutive games. In step S820, a value to be added to the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of add-on games, a table for the challenge mode add-on game number lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for drawing the number of additional games in the challenge mode is set so that the number of additional games increases depending on the type of specific combination. For example, for Strong Cherry 1 and 2, there is an 80% probability that 30 games will be added to the challenge mode, and there will be a 20% probability that 50 games will be added. In addition, for weak cherry, there is an 80% probability that 5 games will be added, and there is a 20% probability that 20 games will be added.

In step S821, processing for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S820 is set in a counter for managing the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode (more specifically, a challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Performs addition processing. Then, in step S822, a process is performed to set the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the first specific combination process is ended. The top-up command includes information that the top-up has occurred, the number of top-up games, and the target for the top-up (challenge mode or attack mode). The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the additional commands will be described in detail later, but based on the reception of the additional commands, the display control device 81 performs additional processing as a notification of information included in these additional commands. Perform notifications (additional effects).

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S819, the process advances to step S823. In step S823, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific combination processing is ended. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the condition for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Although details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition will be performed at the end of the bonus. In addition, in this embodiment, since the first specific combination process is not executed in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, basically, the point that a negative determination is made in step S9819 is as described above. That is, step S823 is used in a configuration in which a player can win both the bonus and the challenge mode lottery.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S703 or an affirmative determination is made in step S704, the process advances to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the second RT state. If it is the second RT state, it is determined in step S707 whether the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery, and is cleared when transitioning to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S707, a second specific combination process is executed in step S708. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S706 or an affirmative determination is made in step S707, a third specific combination process is executed in step S709.

<Second specific combination processing>
The second specific combination processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

Here, the case where the second specific combination processing is performed is the second RT state and the state where the player has not won the VB mode. The display mode in this case is attack mode. In the second specific combination processing, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to the VB mode. In addition, in the second specific combination processing, a lottery for promoting the rank of the attack mode is carried out, and processing for adding up the number of consecutive games of the attack mode is carried out.

That is, in step S901, processing is performed to understand the rank of the attack mode. As already explained, in this embodiment, four attack mode ranks, ie, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different for each rank. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined which of the first to fourth attack modes the current rank of attack mode is.

In step S902, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the attack mode rank determined in step S901 is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries 1 and 2 and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherries 1 and 2 than for weak cherries. In addition, in the VB mode lottery table for each rank, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is different overall, and the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. Just as the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for those in the third attack mode than for those in the second attack mode, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for those in the fourth attack mode than those in the third attack mode. The transition probability is set to be high.

In step S903, a VB mode shift lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to a VB mode win.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process is performed in which a VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 in step S905. Thereafter, in steps S906 to S909, processing for setting the number of portent games is performed in the same manner as steps S807 to S810. That is, in step S906, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the second specific combination processing is directly ended. If it is not set, in step S907, a lottery process for the number of portent games is executed, in step S908, a process for setting the number of portent games in the portent counter is executed, and in step S909, a process for setting a portent command is executed. After that, the second specific combination processing is ended.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not a VB mode winning, the process advances to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processing for promoting rank in attack mode.

In step S910, an attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. There are multiple tables for the promotion lottery depending on the rank of the attack mode, specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, a table for the third attack mode, and a table for the third attack mode. There are three (promotion lottery will not be held when staying in the fourth attack mode). At each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between the strong cherries 1 and 2 and the weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for the strong cherries 1 and 2 than for the weak cherries. In addition, in the table for each attack mode, the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode, and the table for the third attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the second attack mode. The table for attack mode is set so that the probability of promotion is lower, and as the rank of attack mode is promoted, it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion win. If the promotion has been won, an attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In this process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the rank of the current attack mode to the rank flag one level higher. Thereafter, in step S913, processing is performed to set the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81. The promotion command includes information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like to perform an attack mode effect for the rank to which the rank is to be promoted. As the attack mode effect on the auxiliary display section 65, for example, a different background color effect is set depending on the rank of the attack mode, and the display control device 81 displays the attack mode effect when the promotion command is received. In addition to notifying that the rank has been promoted, control is performed so that an attack mode effect is performed with a background color that corresponds to the rank to which the rank has been promoted.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the process in step S913 is executed, processes for increasing the number of consecutive games in the attack mode are performed in steps S915 to S920.

That is, in step S914, an additional lottery process for the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In this additional lottery process, a table for the attack mode additional lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The attack mode supplementary lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the supplementary lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, a strong cherry has an 80% probability of winning the additional lottery, and a weak cherry has a 20% probability of winning the additional lottery. Note that the probability of winning may vary depending on the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the player has not won the additional lottery, the second specific combination processing is immediately terminated.

If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S917, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In this lottery process for the number of additional games, a table for the lottery for the number of attack mode additional games is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for drawing the number of additional games in the attack mode is set so that the number of additional games varies depending on the type of specific combination. For example, for Strong Cherry 1 and 2, 20 games of attack mode will be added with a 90% probability, and 80 games will be added with a 10% probability. Furthermore, in weak cherry, there is a 95% probability that 5 games will be added, and there is a 5% probability that 100 games will be added.

In step S918, processing for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S917 is set in a counter for managing the number of consecutive games in the attack mode (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Performs addition processing. Then, in step S919, the process of setting the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the second specific combination process is ended.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process advances to step S920. In step S920, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination processing is ended. The attack mode addition flag is a flag used by the CPU 102 to determine that the attack mode addition condition for the number of games is satisfied. Although details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition will be performed at the end of the bonus. In this embodiment, as described above, the process of step S920 is not performed (no affirmative determination is made in step S916).

<Third specific combination processing>
Next, the third specific combination processing executed in step S709 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

The case where the third specific combination processing is performed is the case in the third RT state, or the state in which the player is in the second RT state and has won the VB mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to attack mode or VB mode. In the third specific combination processing, processing for adding on the number of consecutive games in attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S1001, an attack mode game number addition lottery process is performed. This process is similar to the process in step S914. Note that the probability of winning the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S1001 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1004, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, a process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed, and in step S1006, a process for setting the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the third specific combination process is ended. The processing from step S1003 to step S1006 is similar to the processing from step S916 to step S919. Note that the number of additional games may be different between the lottery process in step S916 and the lottery process in step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third specific combination processing is directly ended. Further, if it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third specific combination processing is ended. The attack mode additional flag is as described above. Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the process of step S1007 is not performed (no affirmative determination is made in step S1003).

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of the current lottery process is not a specific winning combination, or even if it is a specific winning combination, the bonus winning flag is set in step S702. If it is determined that the lottery has been set, in step S710, whether or not the result of the current lottery process is a push order replay or a push order bell (hereinafter also collectively referred to as "push order winning combination") is determined. Determine. If the winning combination is determined by pressing the winning combination, the pressing winning combination is executed in step S711. This push order processing will be explained in detail later.

After executing any one of steps S705, S708, S709, and S711, or after making a negative determination in step S710, the process advances to step S712. In step S712, it is determined whether a specialized zone flag corresponding to the additional specialized zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the 7th replay prize, and the special zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the 7th replay prize. Indicates a state that occurs with probability. If the specialized zone flag is set in step S712, specialized zone processing is executed in step S713. The specialized zone flag, specialized zone, and specialized zone processing will be explained in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S712, or after executing the process in step S713, the main lottery result corresponding process is ended.

As mentioned above, in the lottery result handling process, if it is determined that a specific winning combination has been won, the lottery to shift to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, or challenge Processing for adding to the number of consecutive games in mode or attack mode is performed. If you win the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, after playing the precursor game, you will be notified that you have won the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode. Therefore, the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode shift lottery will be described below.

<Processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the display mode transition lottery result>
(2) In the process for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, there is a process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won, and a notification for transitioning the gaming state. The processing to perform is performed. Therefore, first, a process related to notification of winning the transfer lottery will be explained.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is a specified number). The mode transition notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.

In step S1101, it is determined whether the number of precursor games is 0 or not. Counting of the number of portent games is performed in a winning result corresponding process described later, and the number of portent games is subtracted by one each time one game is played. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is immediately ended.

If the number of portent games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1103. Then, in step S1104, a challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1105, a challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies the start of the challenge mode using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be explained in detail later.

Thereafter, in step S1106, counting of the number of challenge mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 10) of the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode is set in a challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1106, this mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1102 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether the current precursor mode was a precursor mode triggered by winning the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1108. Then, in step S1109, an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state in response to winning the attack mode shift lottery. Thereafter, in step S1110, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the attack mode winning notification command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode transition lottery has been won. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After executing the process of step S1110, this mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1107 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current precursor mode was a precursor mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1112. Then, in step S1113, a VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state in response to winning the VB mode shift lottery. Thereafter, in step S1114, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the VB mode winning notification command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After executing the process in step S1114, this mode transition notification process ends. Further, if it is determined in step S1111 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the mode transition notification process is directly terminated.

That is, among the challenge mode, attack mode, and VB mode that transition through the omen mode, the challenge mode is started based on the bet operation when the number of omen games in the omen mode becomes 0. On the other hand, in the attack mode and VB mode, based on the bet operation when the number of portent games in the portent mode becomes 0, only the notification that you have won the attack mode transfer lottery or the VB mode transfer lottery is performed. Even if the number of games reaches 0, attack mode and VB mode will not start. This is because the challenge mode as a display mode does not involve a transition to the gaming state, while the attack mode and VB mode involve a transition to the gaming state. Specifically, the attack mode does not involve a transition to the second RT state. This is due to the difference that the VB mode is started by transitioning to the third RT state.

As already explained, the second RT state is entered when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the third RT state is entered when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won. The process shifts to the case where the player wins, and the fourth and fifth re-game wins are established. Then, the case where the first promoted replay 1 to 4 is won and the third replay prize is established, or the case where the second promoted replay 1 and 2 is won and the fourth and fifth replay prize is established, This is a case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of these promotion replay wins corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, if you win a lottery to shift to attack mode or VB mode, then in the game in which you win a winning combination that will shift these gaming states, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be announced. The configuration allows the game state to be changed. Please note that from the time you are notified that you have won the transition lottery for attack mode or VB mode until the attack mode or VB mode starts (until the gaming state changes), you will not be notified as a preparation state (for example, " An announcement will be made that “Preparations are in progress”.

<Explanation regarding display mode transition>
The notification process for shifting the gaming state is performed in the push order process (step S710) in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to explaining the pressing order processing, an outline of the case where the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be explained with reference to FIG. 36.

<Summary of push order notification performance>
Notification of the operation order at the time of winning the push order combination (push order notification effect) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the push order notification section 68. Here, a case will be described as an example in which the pressing order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the button corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first among the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 (in the figure, the middle stop The number 1 is added to the middle button (corresponding to the switch 43), and the button is displayed larger than the other button displays. Further, each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). Thereby, the player can recognize the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display section 65, a number is displayed on the right button display to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44, and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. The number 2 is displayed and the number 3 is displayed on the left button display.

In the push order notification section 68, among the three LED lamps 68a, 68b, and 68c arranged on the left and right corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the middle LED lamp 68b lights up, and the left and right LED lamps 68a, 68c light up. goes out. This allows the player to recognize that the first stop switch to be operated in the current game is the middle stop switch 43. Note that the push order notification section 68 may also be configured to notify the winning combination together with the push order by lighting different colors of LED lamps. Further, in order to make it possible to recognize the stop switch to be operated from the second time onward, the LED lamps corresponding to the second and subsequent manipulations may be lit in different colors or may be displayed blinking.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

In the push order notification section 68, the middle LED lamp 68b turns off, and the right LED lamp 68c turns on (the left LED lamp 68a remains off). Thereby, the player can recognize that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

In the push order notification section 68, the right LED lamp 68c is turned off, and the left LED lamp 68a is turned on (the middle LED lamp 68b remains turned off). Thereby, the player can recognize that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the execution timing of the press order notification effect, during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 after the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts and reaches constant speed rotation after the acceleration period, the press order notification effect is executed. The notification effect is set to be executed. In this way, by configuring the press order notification effect to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and then the stop switches 42 to 44 are activated. 44 can be operated as desired, and the game can be played at a good tempo.

<Press order processing>
Next, the push order process executed in step S710 in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 37.

In step S1201, it is determined whether the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 is the case where the first replay or the third replay wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1202, and it is determined whether an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery to enter the attack mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 35). be.

If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1203, a process for notifying the push order of the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the third re-game, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23(a)). Thereafter, in step S1204, a process is performed to set the press order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, and then the main press order process is ended. The press order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the press order notification command will be described in detail later.

Note that the case where the notification of the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning is performed in step S1203 basically means that the player wins the lottery to enter the attack mode, and the notification of the winning of the attack mode is carried out after passing through the omen mode. This is assumed to be after the attack mode is activated, but before the transition to attack mode. That is, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won in the lottery table in the second RT state or the third RT state, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. However, even after transitioning to attack mode, the gaming state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state, and even in such a case, you will not be able to win the 1st promotion replay 1 to 4. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1 to 3. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1205 is the case where the first replay or the second replay wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1207, a process for notifying the push order of the first replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the second re-game, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1208, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

In this way, if you win the first promotion replay 1 to 4 in a situation where you have won the lottery to enter the attack mode, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win will be announced, and the gaming state will be changed to the first one. It becomes possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if you win the first promotion replays 1 to 4 without winning the attack mode, there are cases where the first replay win is achieved and cases where the third replay win is achieved. There is.

In addition, if you win Fall Replay 1 to 3 in a situation where the attack notification flag is set, the gaming state will shift to the 1st RT state by notifying you of the operation order corresponding to the 1st replay winning. It is possible to prevent this from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends and the attack notification flag is cleared and the display mode shifts to normal mode, the second replay prize may be established by winning Fall Replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state to the first RT state.

For example, in the 1st RT state, you win the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 without winning the attack mode, and the order of operations happens to correspond to the 3rd replay win, and the 3rd replay win is established. Even in this case (even if the state shifts to the second RT state), the second replay prize can be established by winning Fall Replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the player happens to move to the second RT state without winning the attack mode, the player will immediately move to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether the current lottery result is either second promotion replay 1 or 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1209 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay will win depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1210, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1211 whether the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the VB mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 35). be.

If the VB notification flag is set, in step S1212, a process for notifying the press order of the fourth regame or the fifth regame is executed. Specifically, among the first re-game, fourth re-game, and fifth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1213, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, a process for notifying the press order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and a process for setting a press order notification command is performed in step S1208. The main push order process ends. Therefore, if you win 2nd promotion replay 1 and 2 without winning VB mode, if you are in attack mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the 1st replay winning will be performed, and if you are not in attack mode, There will be no press-order notification performance.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether the current lottery result is either BAR Replay 1 or 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1214 means that depending on the operation order of the current game, any one of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replay will win a prize. In this case, in step S1215, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether the VB notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, processing for notification of the push order of the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game is executed. Specifically, among the first re-gaming, third re-gaming, and sixth re-gaming to eighth re-gaming, the operation order corresponding to the sixth re-gaming winning to the eighth re-gaming winning is notified (FIG. 23 ( c). After that, in step S1218, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, the process for notifying the press order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the process for setting the press order notification command is performed in step S1208. The main push order processing ends. Therefore, if you win BAR Replay 1 or 2 without winning VB mode, if you are in attack mode, the press order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win will be performed, and if you are not in attack mode, press There will be no announcement performance.

If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the current lottery result is a push order bell win. If the push order bell is won, it is determined in step S1220 whether the current display mode is normal mode or challenge mode. If the mode is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, in step S1221, a process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is executed (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1222, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended. When a negative determination is made in step S1219 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, the main press order processing is directly ended without performing the press order notification process.

<Processing to shift the display mode based on winning results>
<Winning result processing>
Next, as a result of notifying to shift the gaming state as described above, a process will be described in which a winning combination corresponding to the shifting of the gaming state is won (3). This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S411) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

In step S1301, a game number management process is executed. Although details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the aforementioned precursor mode, the number of consecutive games in challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted.

In the subsequent step S1302, it is determined whether or not the current stop result indicates that the third re-game winning has been established. As described above, when the third replay winning is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing is performed to shift the gaming state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1304 whether the current display mode is the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether an attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as flags for specifying the display mode, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to a higher RT state than the attack mode (VB mode, additional specialization zone), the attack mode flag is set to the corresponding flag of that mode (VB mode flag, It is configured to coexist with the special zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1304, the case where it is determined that the attack mode flag is set includes not only the case where the attack mode is in progress but also the case where the case is in the VB mode and the case in the specialization zone. .

If the attack mode flag is set in step S1304, the display mode is already the attack mode, so the main prize winning result handling process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, processing for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, an attack mode flag is set. In the following step S1306, an attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will be started from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, in step S1307, counting of the number of attack mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of consecutive attack mode games is set in the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1307, the main winning result corresponding process is ended.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the third re-game winning has not been established, the process advances to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have been established as the current stop result. As described above, when the fourth and fifth re-gaming wins are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing is performed to shift the gaming state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1309, it is determined whether the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined whether the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, and therefore the main winning result handling process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1311 to S1313.

That is, in step S1311, a process of setting a VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that transitions through the attack mode, and the transition to the attack mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

Thereafter, in step S1312, a VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the VB mode start command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will be started from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1313, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 60) of the number of consecutive games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1313, the main prize winning result corresponding process ends.

If it is determined in step S1308 that the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have not been established, the process advances to step S1314. In step S1314, it is determined whether or not the seventh re-game winning is established as the current stop result. In this embodiment, when the 7th re-game winning is established, that is, the "Black BAR" symbol is placed in the middle of the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol is placed in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol is placed in the middle of the right reel 32R. When the "Black BAR" symbol stops and the "Black BAR" symbol stops on the middle combination line, the system shifts to the special add-on zone. In the special bonus zone, the number of consecutive games in attack mode is increased not only for specific winning combinations but also for all winnable winning combinations (push order winning combination, specific winning combination, and bonus). Note that the case where the 7th replay win is established is the case where the BAR replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th replay win (Fig. 23 (c)) Furthermore, this is a case where the 7th replay out of the 1st, 6th, and 7th replay wins a lottery. The player wins the lottery in which the seventh re-game wins with a probability of 1.

If the seventh re-game winning is established, it is determined in step S1315 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, in step S1316, a specialized zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialized zone, and by setting the specialized zone flag, counting of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is stopped. . In this case, the attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the specialized zone transitions into the VB mode, and also because the specialized zone always transitions to the VB mode after the specialized zone ends.

Thereafter, in step S1317, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the specialized zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1318, counting of the number of continued specialized zones is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games of the specialized zone is set in the specialized zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1318, the main prize winning result corresponding process ends. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1314 or step S1315, the winning result handling process is directly terminated.

As mentioned above, based on the winning combination (3rd to 5th replay) corresponding to the transition of the gaming state, the processing for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 21). conduct. This is to prevent attack mode etc. from being started based on a winning combination that corresponds to changing the gaming state, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. It is.

Also, when transitioning to a display mode, among those that involve transitioning to a gaming state, transitioning to a higher mode, i.e., transitioning from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, or transitioning from attack mode to VB mode, Alternatively, when transitioning from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the configuration is such that the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of a transition to a lower mode, for example, when the game state is transitioned due to a second replay winning as a fall replay or a stoppage of the transition roll, the display mode is not transitioned. When moving to a lower mode, the gaming state is managed by winning results (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in different games.

<Number of games management process>
The game number management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted, and the number of consecutive games in these display modes is 0. Based on this, processing for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be performed with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not a 3 bet, the number of games management process is ended. That is, in 1-bet and 2-bet games, the number of games in the portent mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode etc. are not counted.

If the game to be ended this time is a 3-bet game, the process advances to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set or the bonus state is present. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the process of clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag is performed in step S1403, and then the game number management process ends. do. In other words, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games such as attack mode is not counted. Note that if each flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, while the attack mode flag, VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, the attack notification flag and VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the bonus ends, after going through a preparation state such as attack mode, these flags are used to notify the press order for shifting the gaming state, making it possible to return to the gaming state before the bonus.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether the number of portent games is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of portent games is subtracted by 1 in step S1405. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (not in precursor mode), or after executing the process in step S1405, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1427. .

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the challenge mode, the process advances to step S1407, and the challenge mode continuation counter is subtracted by 1, thereby subtracting the number of challenge mode continuation games. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether the challenge mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and a challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1410. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command notifies the end of the challenge mode in the current game on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. After performing the process of step S1410, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not challenge mode, the process advances to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether the current display mode is attack mode. If it is the attack mode, the process advances to step S1412, where the attack mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby subtracting the number of games in which the attack mode can be continued. Then, in step S1413, it is determined whether the attack mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1414, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1415. Thereafter, in step S1416, an attack mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command notifies the end of the attack mode in the current game on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After performing the process of step S1416, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the mode is not attack mode, the process advances to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether the current display mode is VB mode. If the mode is VB mode, the process advances to step S1418, and it is determined whether the zone is an additional specialization zone. If it is not the special add-on zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1419, thereby decrementing the number of VB mode continuation games. Then, in step S1420, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1421, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1422. Thereafter, in step S1423, a VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command notifies the end of the VB mode in the current game on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After performing the process of step S1423, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1418 that the area is in the special add-on zone, the process advances to step S1424. In step S1424, the number of continuous games in the specialized zone is subtracted by subtracting 1 from the specialized zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1425, it is determined whether the specialized zone continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is 0, the specialized zone flag is cleared in step S1426, and a specialized zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1427. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone end command notifies the end of the specialized zone in the current game on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. Such notification may include, for example, notification of the number of games in which the game has been successfully added in total in the current specialized zone. After performing the process of step S1427, the number of games management process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1425, the number of games management process is directly ended.

<Completion judgment process>
Next, as the process when the bonus ends, the end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether the bonus termination conditions are met or not, and if the bonus is to be terminated, processing is performed to notify the winner of the attack mode, etc. where the bonus has been won in duplicate, and the attack mode in which the bonus has been won in duplicate. Perform processing to add on the number of games, etc.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been achieved. As already explained, the first small winning combination (BB medium small winning combination 1) is achieved with high probability during the bonus (FIG. 28). In addition, when winning the BB medium and small winning combination 2 (IV=33), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 39th small winning combination (FIG. 27(b)), and the first If the 39th small role of the 39th small role and the 39th small role wins a lottery, the 39th small role is won. In this embodiment, for example, when winning the BB medium/small winning combination 2, the probability of winning the 39th small winning combination is 1/100. When winning the BB medium and small winning combination 3 (IV=34), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of operation corresponding to the winning of the 40th small winning combination (FIG. 27(b)), and then the first small winning combination is won. If the 40th small role of the 40th small role wins a lottery, the 40th small role is won. In this embodiment, for example, when winning the BB medium BAR winning combination, the probability of winning the 40th minor winning combination is 1/200.

If it is determined in step S1501 that a small winning combination has been achieved, a process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the remaining number of payouts is performed in step S1502. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after executing the process in step S1502, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the remaining number of payouts has become 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is directly ended. If it is 0, the bonus end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1504, and then in steps S1505 to S1518, processing for winning notification such as attack mode, etc. Performs processing for adding on the number of consecutive games.

That is, in step S1505, it is determined whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, a lottery process for the number of portent games is performed in step S1506, the number of portent games is set in step S1507, and a portent command is set in step S1508. The processing in steps S1506 to S1508 is similar to the processing in steps S808 to S810. After executing the process in step S1508, the end determination process ends.

That is, if the bonus ends in a situation where the player has won the attack mode, after the bonus ends, a precursor game is played, and then the attack mode winner is notified. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while making them expect that the situation will change to an advantageous state again after the bonus ends.

Here, if a bonus is won during the portent mode before any winning notification, the number of portent games has already been set when the lottery process for the number of portent games is performed in step S1506. In this embodiment, even in such a case, the number of portent games is reset. In other words, regardless of the number of remaining games when the bonus is won, after the bonus ends, the number of precursor games is set again to 1 out of 1 to 32 games. By doing this, it is possible to make the player feel excited for a long time after the bonus ends.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1505, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode in steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and then the end determination process is ended. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1509, it is determined in step S1510 whether the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode in steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and then the end determination process is ended. That is, if the bonus ends in a situation where the player has also won the challenge mode or the VB mode, after the bonus ends, the winner of the challenge mode or the VB mode is notified through a precursor game.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, the process advances to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether the attack mode addition flag is set. If the attack mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed in step S1512, a process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed in step S1513, and an additional command is set in step S1514. . The processing in steps S1512 to S1514 is similar to the processing in steps S917 to S919. After executing the process in step S1514, the end determination process ends.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1511, it is determined in step S1515 whether the challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is performed in step S1516, an additional process for the number of games in the challenge mode is performed in step S1517, and an additional command is set in step S1518. . The processing in steps S1516 to S1518 is similar to the processing in steps S820 to S822. If a negative determination is made in step S1515, or after executing the process in step S1518, the end determination process is ended.

<Specialized zone processing>
Next, the specialized zone processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. The specialized zone process is a process executed in step S712 in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31). As already explained, the player enters the specialized zone during the VB mode, and during the specialized zone, the number of consecutive games of attack mode is added to each game.

That is, in the specialized zone processing, first, in step S1601, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the subsequent step S1602, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the following step S1603, processing for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1604, an additional command is set, and then the specialized zone processing ends. The processing from step S1602 to step S1604 is similar to the processing from step S917 to step S919. However, the number of games to be selected is greater in the number of additional games lottery process in step S1602 than in the number of additional games lottery process in step S917.

<Processing regarding notification performance on the sub side>
Next, various notification processes performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described as (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. As a process for various notifications, an effect setting process that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

In the effect setting process, first in step S1701, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1702. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and read out the previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after executing the process in step S1702, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command is a bet time command. The bet command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on a bet operation, and in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process, the mode transition notification process (Fig. 35), the challenge mode start command, the attack mode winning notification command, the VB mode winning notification command, etc. If these are the bet time commands, a bet time performance setting process is executed in step S1704.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after executing the process in step S1704, it is determined in step S1705 whether the newly received command is a start command. The start command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, as well as the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third specific combination processing (FIGS. 32 to 34), push order notification commands set in the push order processing (FIG. 37), and the like. If it is one of these start time commands, start time effect setting processing is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after executing the process in step S1706, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command is a command for each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a command output from the main controller 101 in step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). This is a stop command that is set in . If the command is a stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, a production setting process at each stop operation is executed in step S1708.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after executing the process in step S1708, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is the winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to the commands, attack mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, specialization set in the winning result response process (Figure 38) There are zone termination commands, etc. If it is one of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S1710.

If a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after executing the process in step S1710, other processes are executed in step S1711, and then the effect setting process is ended. In step S1711, effects are set based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), and connections are made without going through the main controller 101. Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), settings for effects, settings for error notification, etc. are performed.

Below, the effect setting process at the time of bet, the effect setting process at start, the effect setting process at each stop operation, and the effect setting process at all stops will be explained. Note that each effect setting process will be explained with reference to the schematic diagrams of display effects shown in FIGS. 54 to 59.

<Bet performance setting process>
The bet time performance setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the currently received bet command includes a challenge mode start command. If a challenge mode start command is included, processing for setting a challenge mode start effect is performed in step S1802. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the characters "Challenge mode start" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the display mode to be transitioned to is likely to win the attack mode transition lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) indicating that it is a chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, ``Grasp the attack mode!'' in a deep male voice).

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the currently received bet command includes an attack mode winning notification command. If an attack mode winning notification command is included, processing for setting an attack mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1804. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the characters "Attack mode confirmed" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack number one!" in a high-pitched female voice).

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a VB mode winning notification command. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, processing for setting a VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1806. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the words "VICTORY BONUS confirmed" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" in male and female voices).

After executing any of the processes in step S1802, step S1804, and step S1806, or if a negative determination is made in step S1805, in step S1807, other bet effects are set, and then the main effect setting process is performed. end. In the process of step S1807, for example, in response to the receipt of a bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 for the corresponding number of bets are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. For example, a process for returning from the demo mode where one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined period of time, and a lamp around the start lever 41 is lit to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing, etc.

<Start production setting process>
Next, the start effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44.

In step S1901, display mode setting processing is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or specialized zone, and the display mode is set in the corresponding display mode. , settings are made so that the display effect on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed. Specifically, in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side, a challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag are set as flags for understanding the display mode. Areas are provided, and a corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and a corresponding flag is cleared at the end of each mode. For example, in the process of setting the challenge mode start effect in step S1802, a challenge mode flag is set. In step S1901, by understanding these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In the following step S1902, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a push order win. If the pressing order winning combination is determined, a pressing order notification process is performed in step S1903. Here, the press order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the start command currently received includes a press order notification command. If the press order notification command is not included, the main press order notification process is ended. If a press order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether the current lottery result is the first promotion replay 1 to 4. If it is the first promotion replay 1 to 4, in step S2003, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the press order that the third replay winning is established, and then the press order notification process is performed. end.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replay 1 to 4 has not been won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is a fall replay 1 to 3. If it is a fall replay 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2005, and the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled to notify the press order that the first replay win is established, and then the process for press order notification ends. do.

If it is determined in step S2004 that it is not a fall replay 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery result is a second promotion replay 1 or 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notified flag indicating that the VB winning notification has been set is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. The notification completed flag is cleared based on transition to VB mode. Then, in step S2007, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence of the notification completed flag. If the winning of the VB mode has been announced, in step S2008, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the pressing order that the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are achieved, and then the pressing order is notified. end the process. If the winning of the VB mode has not been announced, the process advances to step S2005, where the press order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the press order notification process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the current lottery result is the BAR replay 1 or 2. If it is BAR replay 1 or 2, the mode correspondence flag is checked in step S2010 to determine whether the current display mode is VB mode. If the VB mode is in effect, in step S2011, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the press order that the 6th to 8th re-game winnings are achieved, and then the process for press order notification ends. do. If the VB mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S2005, where the press order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the press order notification process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2009 that it is not BAR replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the current lottery result is a bell. If it is a bell win, in step S2013, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the push order that the bell win is established as the first minor role, and then the push order notification process is ended. . If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the press order notification process is directly terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start performance setting process (FIG. 44), if it is determined in step S1902 that the push order winning combination is not won, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not the specific winning combination is won. If the specific winning combination is won, specific winning notification processing is performed in step S1905. The specific winning combination notification process will be explained in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after executing the process in step S1903 or step S1905, the process advances to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether an additional command has been received as the current start command. If the add-on command has been received, in step S1907, processing is performed to set the add-on effect in advance so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed as "+10" on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the additional performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "Kyukyukyukyueen!").

The details of the additional effect setting process in step S1907 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46.

In step S2101, processing is performed to determine the number of add-on games based on the add-on command received this time. In the following step S2102, a notification timing lottery process is executed. The notification timing lottery process is a process of randomly selecting at which timing in the game the additional effect will be performed, assuming that the additional effect will be performed in the current game.

The execution timing of the additional effects is set to differ depending on the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 47, as the execution timing of the additional effects in this game, the first reel, second reel, third reel, and Then, the times when the first reel is stopped, the second reel is stopped, and the third reel is stopped are set. Then, among the stop operations for each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation was performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 were pressed, and the timing at which the stop OFF operation was performed when the pressing operation was completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44. The stop switches 42 to 44 are movable from an initial position located on the front side to an operating position located on the rear side. When placed at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by being operated from the initial position to the operating position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are Switches from LOW signal to HI signal. Then, the main controller 101 determines that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal.

Further, the stop switches 42 to 44 are biased toward the initial position by springs or the like. Therefore, if you release your hands from the stop switches 42 to 44 and do not apply the operating force (pressing force) that pushed them toward the operating position, the stop switches 42 to 44 will be moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. to return to. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Then, the main controller 101 determines that a stop OFF operation has been performed, which indicates that the pressing operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been completed, based on the detection signal switching from the HI signal to the LOW signal.

The additional effect is set so that it can occur when each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated as a stop ON operation or when a stop OFF operation is performed. That is, in a game where an additional effect occurs, the additional effect may occur not only at the timing when the stop switch 42 to 44 is pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the execution timing table for the top-up effect, when the number of top-up games is relatively small, for example, when the top-up occurs for 5 to 10 games, the timing when the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 50%. , the timing when the first reel's stop OFF operation was performed is 5%, the second reel's stop ON operation is 20%, the second reel's stop OFF operation is 5%, the third reel's stop ON operation is 10%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is selected at 10%. In this case, each reel is more likely to be selected when the reel is stopped ON than when it is stopped OFF.

On the other hand, if the number of games with a relatively large number of add-on games is 100 or more games, the timing when the first reel stop ON operation is selected is 5%, and the first reel stop OFF operation is selected. The timing at which was performed is 20%, the second reel stop ON operation is 10%, the second reel stop OFF operation is 35%, the third reel stop ON operation is 10%, the third reel stop OFF operation ( (when all reels are stopped) is 20%, and each is selected. In this case, each reel is more easily selected when the reel is operated to stop and turn OFF than when it is operated to be stopped and turned ON.

In other words, in this embodiment, the additional effect is more likely to occur for a large number of games when the additional effect occurs when the stop OFF operation is performed for each reel than when the additional effect occurs when the stop ON operation is performed for each reel. It is set. Also, when comparing the first to third reels, the game with the highest number of stop operations (ON operation, OFF operation) on the second reel is likely to be selected, and the game with the second largest number of stop operations on the third reel is likely to be selected. It is set so that the number of games that is the smallest when the first reel is stopped is easily selected.

In this way, since the number of additional games to be notified differs depending on the stop order, expectations for the additional effects can be varied for each stop operation. For example, during a stop operation where a large number of additional effects are likely to occur, it is possible to make people expect that effect to occur.Specifically, when the second reel is stopped, especially when the second reel is stopped OFF, It can be expected at times. In this case, for example, as a player who expects an additional effect when the second reel is stopped and turned OFF, the player should calm down and hope that an additional effect will occur before the second reel is stopped and turned OFF. At the same time, it is considered that the second reel is stopped and turned off.

In other words, if there is a possibility that a notification that will be advantageous to the player if a predetermined operation is performed, the player will temporarily stop playing before performing the predetermined operation due to the expectation of the notification. However, after making time to save money and enjoying the time to the fullest, there are cases where the predetermined operation is performed. This is because by doing so, the user can enjoy the information to the fullest rather than receiving the information that would be advantageous without preparing mentally. In this regard, as mentioned above, by increasing the anticipation when the second reel is stopped OFF, time is created before the second reel is stopped OFF, that is, when the second reel is stopped ON. It becomes easier. In this way, in relation to the timing of notification of the benefits to be obtained, it becomes easier to save time during the stop operation.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the additional effect, after performing the notification timing lottery process in step S2102, in step S2103, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S2102 was when any reel was stopped ON. judge. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2104, a target reel for generating an additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur when the stop ON operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, processing is performed to set any one of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing at which the additional effect occurs. Further, in step S2104, the performance data of the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the performance data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined performance data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 recognizes that an additional performance will occur at a timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads out the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area and causes the additional performance to be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the first reel or the second reel is being operated to stop or turn OFF. If it is the time of the stop OFF operation of these reels, in step S2106, a target reel for generating an additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur at the time of the stop OFF operation of the target reel. Specifically, processing is performed to set either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing at which the additional effect occurs. Also, in step S2106, processing is performed in which the performance data of the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games is read from the performance data storage area 182b and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined performance data setting area.

If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the current additional effect is set to occur when all reels are stopped (when the third reel is turned OFF). Specifically, a process is performed in which a third reel stop OFF operation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. Further, in step S2107, temporary storage processing of performance data of the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the process of step S2104, step S2106, or step S2107, the additional effect setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the start effect setting process, if the additional command is not received in step S1906, or after executing the process in step S1907, the bonus notification process is executed in step S1908, and the bonus notification process is executed in step S1909. The continuous effect setting process is executed, and then, in step S1910, other start effects are set, and then the start effect setting process is ended. The bonus notification process and the continuous performance setting process will be explained in detail later. In the process of step S1910, for example, in response to the start of the game, an effect suggesting the lottery result is set, a lamp around the start lever 41 is turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc.

<Production setting processing for each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting process for each stop operation performed in step S1708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

In step S2201, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed among the stop operations for each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned on is set as an effect for the current game. If it has not been set, this setting process ends. If set, in step S2203, it is determined whether the stop ON operation command received this time is for a reel stop operation that is the target of the set effect during the stop ON operation. If it is not a stop ON operation for the target reel, this setting process is directly ended. If it is a stop ON operation for the target reel, in step S2204, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a presentation is performed at the time of the stop ON operation, and then this setting process is ended.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the current stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. 49(a), the auxiliary display section 65 An additional performance will occur. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is emitted from the speaker 64.

In addition, for example, if this game is a press order winning combination and a press order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel will stop based on each stop ON operation, and the press order notification effect will become the next operation target. The effect changes to show the reel. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation, a display is displayed indicating that the first reel is the operation target as shown in FIG. 36(a). . When the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) is shown as shown in FIG. 36(b). It changes into a performance. In addition, if the two reels are rotating before the performance when the stop ON operation is performed, a display showing that the second reel is to be stopped is displayed as shown in FIG. 36(b), and the second reel is rotated by the stop ON operation. Based on the reel stopping, the display changes to indicate that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 36(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2205, and it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command that is output from the main controller 101 when pressing the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations for each reel is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as an effect for the current game. If it has not been set, this setting process ends. If set, in step S2207, it is determined whether the stop OFF operation command received this time is for a reel stop operation that is the target of the set effect during the stop OFF operation. If the operation is not to stop or turn off the target reel, this setting process is immediately terminated. If it is a stop OFF operation for the target reel, it is determined in step S2208 whether or not special notification is set. The special notification will be explained in detail later, but the special notification is set as a performance different from the normal OFF-time performance in relation to the stop result based on the previous stop ON operation. If the special notification has not been set, in step S2209, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that a normal stop OFF operation effect is performed, and then this setting process is ended.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the current stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the main effect setting process is directly ended. Moreover, the process when an affirmative determination is made in step S2208 will be described in detail later.

<Processing for setting effects when fully stopped>
Next, the full stop effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a challenge mode end command. If a challenge mode end command is included, in step S2302, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that a challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the characters "Challenge mode end" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "Be more devoted!" in a deep male voice).

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the attack mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. If an attack mode start command is included, processing for setting an attack mode start effect is performed in step S2304. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(a), characters such as "Attack Mode!! Ver. 1" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the attack mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack mode start!" in a high-pitched female voice).

Incidentally, the display of "Ver. 1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. In other words, this is a display indicating that the attack mode started this time is the first attack mode. When the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the characters "Attack Mode!! Ver. 2" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as a promotion effect. Also, when the rank of attack mode is promoted to the 3rd attack mode, the text "Attack mode!! Ver. 3" is displayed, and when the rank of attack mode is promoted to the 4th attack mode, the text "Attack mode!! Ver. 4" is displayed. Display is performed.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2303, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the currently received stop command includes an attack mode end command. If an attack mode end command is included, processing for setting an attack mode end effect is performed in step S2306. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. ), and also displays the total number of coins paid out in the current attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you again" in a high-pitched female voice).

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2305, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode start command. If a VB mode start command is included, processing for setting a VB mode start effect is performed in step S2308. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the characters "777 VICTORY!!" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the VB mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory Bonus Start" in male and female voices).

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2307, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode end command. If a VB mode end command is included, processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed in step S2312. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the characters "VICTORY BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the number of consecutive games of attack mode at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. Displays the number of consecutive games (including VB mode and specialized zone), and also displays the total number of coins paid out in attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "It's still going on" in male and female voices).

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2311, it is determined in step S2313 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone start command. If a specialized zone start command is included, processing for setting a specialized zone start effect is performed in step S2314. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the words "Additional challenge!!", and a special mode in which additions to the attack mode are likely to occur is displayed. Displays a character that suggests that In addition, in the specialized zone start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go!" in a boy's voice).

If the specialized zone start command is not included in step S2313, it is determined in step S2315 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone end command. If a specialized zone end command is included, in step S2316, processing is performed to set a specialized zone end effect. In the specialized zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the current specialized zone. In addition, in the specialized zone end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "Kyukyukyukyu!"). Note that it is preferable to vary the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 depending on the total number of additional games.

If the specialized zone end command is not included in step S2315, it is determined in step S2317 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a bonus end command. If a bonus end command is included, processing for setting a bonus end effect is performed in step S2318. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of coins paid out during the current bonus, and if the bonus is in attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, attack mode ( Displays the total number of coins paid out (including VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end performance, a performance using characters etc. that suggests these contents is performed depending on whether the attack mode is successful or not, the challenge mode is successful or not, and the number of additional games.

After executing any of the processes in step S2302, step S2304, step S2306, step S2308, step S2312, step S2314, step S2316, and step S2318, or after making a negative determination in step S2315, proceed to step S2309 and step S2319. move on. In steps S2309 and S2319, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to execute the additional effect if the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S1907 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the additional effect setting process (FIG. 46), if the current generation timing of the additional effect is set to full stop, all reels 32L, 32M, as shown in FIG. 49(c), , 32R is stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is emitted from the speaker 64.

Thereafter, in steps S2310 and S2320, other stop effects are set, and then the main effect setting process is ended. In steps S2310 and S2320, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination. , and controls the speaker 64 to emit sound effects corresponding to automatic bets during replay.

As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the display control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notifying the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Processing for production during various games>
In this embodiment, continuous effects and bonus effects are provided as effects during various games. A continuous performance is a performance that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, attack mode, challenge mode, VB mode, etc.), and is performed multiple times (four times in this embodiment). This is a performance that can be continued for a long period of time, and is a performance that informs whether or not there was an advantageous result in the final game. The mid-bonus performance is a performance performed in each game during the bonus state that is transitioned based on the first BB or second BB winning.

An overview of the continuous performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 59.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59(a), at the start of the first game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of consecutive effects is displayed (in the figure, four stages correspond to the continuous effects of four games). (Shows a nodaruma drop performance). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect was set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect of the successful Daruma Drop in the first stage, (This indicates that the continuous performance continues). If the continuous performance is interrupted, at the end of the first game for which the continuous performance was set, a performance will be performed to notify that the continuous performance will end midway (for example, a performance in which the first Daruma drop fails, etc.) ). The presentation regarding whether or not to continue the continuous presentation is the same for each game in the continuous presentation.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), at the start of the second game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, there are three remaining Daruma doll effects). Then, at the end of the second game, a performance is performed to notify whether or not the continuous performance will continue. ).

As shown in FIG. 59(c), at the start of the third game in which continuous effects have been set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, there are two remaining daruma doll drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, a performance is performed to notify whether or not the continuous performance will continue. ).

As shown in FIG. 59(d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous performance, a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous performance is performed (in the figure, a one-stage Daruma drop performance). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is performed to show whether or not the result was advantageous to the player (the figure shows an effect indicating that the Daruma drop in the final stage was successful).

As described above, in the continuous performance, the performance of the next game is set by taking over the performance of the previous game, and the performance of each game has continuity. Furthermore, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of the continuous performance (how many games there are until the end of the continuous performance).

Here, in each game of continuous performance, whether or not the continuous performance continues until the next game is set such that the more the game of continuous performance progresses, the higher the continuation rate becomes. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous performance, there is the highest possibility that the discontinuation of the continuous performance will be notified, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility that the discontinuation will be notified. Therefore, in a continuous production, the level of interest of the players varies greatly depending on the number of games in the continuous production that the current game is, and the interest increases as the game progresses from the starting game to the ending game. .

The setting of the continuous performance is performed in the specific combination notification process (step S1905), the bonus notification process (step S1908), and the continuous performance setting process (step S1909) in the start performance setting process (FIG. 44). Therefore, each process will be explained in turn below.

<Bonus notification processing>
First, the bonus notification process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51.

In the bonus notification process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether the game to be started is a bonus winning game based on the lottery result command received this time. If it is a bonus winning game, in step S2402, a notification game lottery process for notifying the bonus winning is executed. In this notification game lottery process, the number of games after which the bonus winning will be announced is determined by lottery. Specifically, one notification game is determined from 0 games (to be notified in the current game) to 10 games. In addition, in the lottery of the notification game, the notification game may be different depending on the winning combination that triggered the winning (whether or not it was a duplicate win, and if it was a duplicate win, the type of the overlapping small win, etc.). For example, if a bonus is won by duplicating 1 or 2 strong cherries, a smaller number of games may be more likely to be selected, and if a bonus is won by duplicating weaker cherries, a larger number of games may be more likely to be selected. .

In the following step S2403, a process is performed to set the number of consecutive performance games based on the notification game determined in the process of step S2402. Specifically, in step S2403, a continuous effect game is set in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous performance counter is a counter for keeping track of the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration that performs a continuous performance of four games, the continuous performance is started in a game where the continuous performance counter becomes 4, and the result notification is performed in a game where the continuous performance counter becomes 0. More specifically, for example, if it is determined in step S2402 to notify the bonus winning after 10 games, 10 is input to the continuous performance counter in step S2403. In this case, the continuous performance starts from the game where the continuous performance counter is 4. If it is determined in step S2402 to notify the bonus winning after 5 games, 5 is input to the continuous performance counter in step S2403. Even in this case, the continuous performance starts from the game where the continuous performance counter is 4.

Note that if less than four notification games are set in step S2402, the continuous performance is started from the middle. For example, if it is determined in step S2402 that the bonus winning will be announced after two games, 2 is input to the continuous performance counter in step S2403. In this case, the continuous performance starts from the current game, and is performed from the performance of the third continuous performance game shown in FIG. 59(c).

After executing the process of step S2403, a continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S2404. The continuous performance flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that a continuous performance is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after executing the process in step S2404, the process advances to step S2405. In step S2405, it is determined whether a bonus game is to be started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the next game in which the first BB or second BB is won until the end of the bonus. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2405 is the case where the first BB or the second BB winning is achieved in the previous game. In this case, in step S2406, the number of bonus effect games is set in the bonus effect counter in the various counter areas 183b in the RAM 183. The bonus performance counter is a counter for executing a performance set for each game as the bonus game progresses, and a performance corresponding to the counter is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like.

As already explained, in this embodiment, in the first BB and second BB bonus games, the winning combination is won in which 9 medals are paid out every game, and the bonus ends when 216 medals are paid out. In other words, the first BB and second BB bonus games end after 24 games. The effect in the bonus game is set to be executed over 24 games, and the above-mentioned bonus effect counter is a counter for determining which game of the 24 games the effect should be performed. It is. In step S2406, the bonus effect counter is set to 24 as the number of bonus effect games, and the bonus effect counter is subtracted for each bonus game. After performing the process in step S2406, in step S2407, a bonus effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The mid-bonus performance flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the mid-bonus performance is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2405, or after executing the process in step S2407, this bonus notification process ends.

<Processing for notification of specific winnings>
Next, the specific winning combination notification process executed in step S1905 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52.

First, in step S2501, special notification processing is executed. In the special notification process, by winning a specific combination, for example, it is notified that there is an expectation of winning a bonus repeatedly, or that there is an expectation of transition to the attack mode or VB mode or an additional bonus. The special notification process will be explained in detail later.

After performing the process in step S2501, it is determined in step S2502 whether a precursor command is included as the current start command. If no precursor command is included, it is determined in step S2503 whether an additional command is included as the current start command. If the bonus command is not included, it is determined in step S2504 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won a bonus, that is, if you have won a specific role as a lottery result, but you have not won a lottery to transition to challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or an additional lottery for the number of consecutive games, If the player has not won the bonus either, a lottery process in the pseudo omen mode is executed in step S2505. Pseudo omen mode is visually difficult to distinguish from omen mode, but in omen mode, the player is notified of an advantageous result (such as winning a challenge mode) based on the completion of the number of omen games. The pseudo-harbinger mode is a mode in which the game ends without notifying the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo-harbinger games.

In step S2505, a table for pseudo omen mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and counters for lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 183b, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo omen mode. conduct. The table for the pseudo omen mode lottery is set so that the probability of winning the pseudo omen mode lottery is different depending on the type of specific winning combination.For example, strong cherries 1 and 2 are more likely to be won than weak cherries. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo omen mode is higher than that of the lottery.

In step S2506, it is determined based on the processing result in step S2505 whether or not the pseudo omen mode lottery has been won. If the player has won, in step S2507, a lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo omen mode is performed. This process corresponds to step S808 and the like on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo precursor games of 1 from 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In the following step S2508, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2507 is set in a continuous performance counter. In this embodiment, when the omen mode or pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or pseudo omen mode ends after continuous performance. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo-harbinger games into the continuous effect counter in step S2508, when the remaining number of games in the pseudo-harbinger mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (4 games remaining), the continuous effect is started. It happens.

In step S2509, a process is executed to set a pseudo flag indicating that the mode is a pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage areas 183a. In the following step S2510, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the specific winning combination notification process ends. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2502 to S2504, or if a negative determination is made in step S2506, the specific winning combination notification process is immediately terminated.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous performance setting process performed in step S1909 of the start time performance setting process (FIG. 44) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

In step S2601, it is determined whether a precursor command is included as the start command currently received. If an omen command is included, in step S2602, processing is performed to input the number of omen games in the omen mode included in the omen command into a continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the portent mode becomes one corresponding to the start of continuous performance (4 games remaining), continuous performance will be started. In the following step S2603, a continuous effect flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or after executing the process in step S2603, the process advances to step S2604. In step S2604, it is determined whether the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous performance counter is performed in step S2605. Then, in step S2606, it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to continuous performance. If the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to continuous performance, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not a pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2608, and the main omen effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2609, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the present precursor performance table and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous performance is Perform the processing to set as . As for the performance data of the continuous performance specified from the performance table for this precursor, if the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, it is the performance data that indicates that the continuous performance will continue until the next game, and the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3. If it is 0, the performance data indicates that the current continuous performance ends successfully.

If it is determined in step S2607 that the pseudo flag is set, the process advances to step S2610. In step S2610, a pseudo omen effect table is obtained from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2611, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the pseudo-harbinger performance table and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous performance is Perform the processing to set as . If the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the continuous performance performance data specified from the pseudo-foreshadowing performance table is performance data indicating that the continuous performance will continue until the next game or performance data indicating that the continuous performance will not continue. If the continuous performance counter is 0, the performance data indicates that the current continuous performance ends in failure.

Note that the performance data specified from the pseudo-harbinger performance table when the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3 includes data for which no continuous performance is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, no continuous effect effect data is set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect will continue until the next game as shown in FIG. 59(a). When the performance data for the first game is set and the continuous performance counter is 0, the performance data for the second continuous performance game is set, which indicates that the continuous performance will not continue until the next game in FIG. 59(b). By doing so, it is possible to set a performance in which the continuous performance is interrupted in the middle of a game in which the number of pseudo-harbinger games in the pseudo-harbinger mode is 0.

After performing the processing in step S2609 or step S2611, it is determined in step S2612 whether the continuous effect counter is 0 or not. If the continuous performance counter is 0, processing to clear the continuous performance flag and pseudo flag is performed in step S2613. Note that if the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S2606 or step S2612, or after performing the process in step S2613, this continuous effect setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2604 that the continuous effect flag is not set, the process advances to step S2614. In step S2614, it is determined whether the bonus effect flag is set. If it has been set, in step S2615, the subtraction process of the bonus performance counter is performed. Specifically, processing is performed to subtract 1 from the bonus performance counter. In the following step S2616, a bonus effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2617, the performance data of the corresponding bonus performance is specified from the bonus performance table and the bonus performance counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b, and the current bonus performance is Perform the processing to set as . In step S2618, it is determined whether the bonus performance counter is 0 or not. If the bonus mid-performance counter is 0, processing to clear the bonus mid-performance flag is performed in step S2619. After that, the main continuous performance setting process is ended.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, the lottery process is performed on the main controller 101 side based on the insertion of medals as game media and the starting operation of the start lever 41, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are Rotation is started, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. In the configuration in which benefits are given, a plurality of RT states are provided with different probabilities of becoming a replay as a result of the lottery process, and the RT state shifts when a prize is established in the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay. Whether or not the corresponding replay will win a prize is determined by the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the lottery, and the notification of the order of operations is made by changing the display mode according to the result of the lottery process. This is done by winning a lottery. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to establish the push order bell prize and win a medal. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as a gaming state where the replay probability is improved, and also to the display mode where the operation order is notified, in the RT state, the replay probability is improved. It is possible to establish a first-order prize and win a large amount of medals.

The trigger events for winning in the display mode transition lottery, attack mode, etc., which are triggers for acquiring a large amount of medals, and the bonus lottery for the number of consecutive games are strong cherry, weak cherry, strong cherry, etc. This occurs when a specific combination such as Watermelon, Weak Watermelon, Chance A, B, or Middle Bell is won. In other words, small roles (single roles) or overlapping roles of IV = 13 to 22, 35 to 48 are set as specific roles, and when these specific roles are won, the display mode shift lottery and An additional lottery will be held, and you will win in a bonus lottery. The specific winning combination is a winning combination with a relatively lower probability than bell, replay, etc., and is also called a rare winning combination. Therefore, the player plays each game while expecting the occurrence of such a relatively low-probability trigger event.

Here, the display mode shift lottery based on the specific combination and the bonus win/fail lottery will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the relationship between the lottery table for the normal game state, the display mode transition lottery, and the set values.

As already explained, the specific combinations include a single combination such as a strong cherry with IV=13 to 22, and a combination combination with a bonus of IV=35 to 48.

The 1st BB and 2nd BB bonuses are determined by the winning flag (the 1BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag) are set. On the other hand, if a single combination of IV=13 to 22 is won, the bonus will not be won twice. That is, if it is determined in step S305 of the lottery process in FIG. Winning flag, strong cherry 2 winning flag, weak cherry winning flag, strong watermelon 1 winning flag, strong watermelon 2 winning flag, strong watermelon 3 winning flag, weak watermelon winning flag, chance A winning flag, chance B winning flag, middle bell winning However, in step S307, the bonus winning flag (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag) is not set. In other words, the triggering event for a bonus win occurs in games where the win was won at IV = 35 to 48, excluding the single bonus win at IV = 49 and 50, and does not occur in the game where the win was won at IV = 13 to 22. .

The probability of occurrence of the triggering event as a bonus win differs depending on the setting value that causes a change in the ball payout rate. In other words, the probability of winning with IV=35 to 48 is set to differ depending on the setting value.For example, the probability of winning with strong cherry duplication 1 (IV=35) is the highest with settings 1 and 2. The probability of winning is determined so that settings 5 and 6 are the most likely to win. In addition, the probability of winning weak watermelon duplication 1, 2 (IV = 41, 42) is determined so that settings 1 and 2 are the easiest to win, and settings 5 and 6 are the least likely to win. . For many duplicate roles, the higher the setting (the larger the setting value), the higher the probability of winning, so the higher the setting is, the higher the probability of winning for each of the 1st BB and 2nd BB bonuses. The higher and lower the setting, the lower the probability of winning.

The display mode transition lottery is carried out when a single winning combination of IV=13 to 22 is won, but it is not carried out when a combination winning combination of IV=35 to 48 is won. Note that FIG. 60 shows a lottery for transitioning to attack mode during normal mode and a lottery for transitioning to attack mode during challenge mode as lottery for transition to ART. The transition lottery to the special zone, the transition lottery to the specialized zone, and the additional lottery for the number of consecutive games in challenge mode and attack mode will be held if a single role of IV = 13 to 22 is won, and IV = 35 to 48. This will not be carried out if a duplicate role is won. In other words, trigger events such as a display mode transition lottery or an additional lottery occur in games where the winnings occur at IV=13 to 22, but do not occur in games where the winners win at IV=35 to 48.

Unlike the triggering event for winning a bonus, the triggering event related to the display mode is determined so that the probability of occurrence does not vary depending on the setting value. That is, for IV=13 to 22, the same winning probability is determined regardless of the setting value, and the winning probability of the transfer lottery and additional lottery is also the same regardless of the setting value. For example, in the attack mode transition lottery, as shown in FIG. 60, when the display mode is normal mode or challenge mode, the transition lottery is held when a winner is won at IV=13 to 22, and other prizes are selected. If you win, the transfer lottery will not be held. In particular, if a winner is won at IV=35 to 48, which has a winning probability that varies depending on the set value, it is set so that the attack mode transition lottery is not performed. The probability of winning the attack mode transition lottery is determined to be the same for IV=13 to 22 regardless of the set value. Although not shown, there is not only a lottery for transitioning to attack mode, but also a lottery for transitioning to challenge mode, a lottery for transitioning to VB mode, a lottery for transitioning to specialized zone, and a lottery for increasing the number of consecutive games in challenge mode and attack mode. Also, the same probability of winning and the same number of additional games are determined regardless of the setting value.

In other words, in this embodiment, the first advantageous state as a bonus state, which is an advantageous state for the player due to a change in the probability (lottery table) of winning or losing a small winning combination, and the notification of the operation order of the pushing winning combination are provided. When compared with a second advantageous state such as attack mode, which becomes an advantageous state for the player by being implemented, the first advantageous state has a winning probability (transition probability) depending on the setting value, and the second advantageous state is determined so that the winning probability (transition probability) does not differ depending on the setting value.

The best part of playing a so-called slot machine is that in each game, a lottery is held to determine whether the winning combination is correct or not, and each reel is stopped depending on the result. There is also the idea that the second advantageous state in which the player is trying to gain is a secondary game. From that perspective, even if it is acceptable that the winning probability of the first advantageous state differs depending on the setting value, it is undesirable that the winning probability differs even for the second advantageous state of the secondary game mentioned above. Conceivable. If even the above-mentioned secondary games have different winning probabilities depending on the setting values, the difference in the ball payout rate depending on the winning probability of each role, which is the main game, will become smaller, and as a result, the master-slave role of the game will be reversed. This is because there is a possibility that the

Therefore, as mentioned above, by adjusting the payout rate according to the first advantageous state and treating the second advantageous state as a secondary game, the first advantageous state can be It is possible to realize gameplay through cooperation between the state and the second advantageous state.

Regarding such a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state, both advantageous states are implemented separately, and settings are made so that the two states do not overlap. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when you win the first BB or the second BB and move to the bonus state (BB state), the bonus state will be maintained until the specified number of payouts are made, and you will not be able to enter the RT state etc. No migration occurs. Further, the display mode also shifts to the BB mode, and the BB mode is maintained until the bonus state ends (transition to the attack mode or the like does not occur). If the first BB or the second BB is won during the attack mode, the display mode shifts to the BB mode, and after the BB mode ends, the attack mode is restarted (FIG. 39).

On the other hand, the configuration is such that a triggering event for one advantageous condition may occur during the other advantageous condition. More specifically, it is a secondary game during the first advantageous state which is the main game, and no trigger event related to the second advantageous state (attack mode transition lottery, additional lottery, etc.) occurs, but during the second advantageous state. The configuration is such that a triggering event (bonus win) regarding the first advantageous state can occur. Specifically, for each small role (IV = 32 to 34) in the bonus state as the first advantageous state, no transition lottery to attack mode or additional lottery is performed, and no triggering event regarding the second advantageous state occurs. . On the other hand, during the attack mode or VB mode as the second advantageous state, it is possible to win a dual role of IV = 35 to 48 or a single bonus role of IV = 49, 50, so a triggering event related to the first advantageous state may occur. . In this way, while restricting the repeated execution of both advantageous situations, the other triggering event is allowed to occur, which makes it easier for a chain of both advantageous situations to occur, thereby increasing the game's interest.

Here, during the bonus state as the first advantageous state, the specific combination that is the trigger event of the second advantageous state is not won. can win a specific role. That is, as already explained, in the lottery process, in a situation where any bonus winning flag is set, even if you win at IV=35 to 51 in the lottery table for normal gaming state, the bonus winning flag or CB winning will not be accepted. No flags are set. Therefore, in a situation where you have won a bonus, the occurrence of an event that could lead to further winning of any bonus is prevented, but the specific combination of IV = 13 to 22 that triggers a trigger event such as attack mode You can win. On the other hand, in the lottery result handling process (Fig. 31), even if these specific combinations are won in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, settings are made so that the first to third specific combination processing will not be carried out. , and trigger events such as attack mode do not occur. In other words, during the carryover state, the trigger event itself for the second advantageous state occurs, but the trigger event itself does not occur. By doing so, it is possible to ensure a good master-slave relationship between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

However, with such a configuration, if the player wins at IV=13 to 22 during the carryover state, the player will feel like he or she is at a loss because the lottery for switching to attack mode will not be performed. there is a possibility. In this case, it can be said that it is preferable for the player to immediately transfer to the bonus after winning the bonus in order to avoid the loss.

However, an event may occur in which it is difficult to establish a bonus win when winning a bonus. One is the case where it is difficult to be notified that the bonus has been won.As already explained, in this embodiment, when the bonus is won, the bonus winning is notified through a portent mode and a continuous performance. (Figures 51 to 53). In such a configuration, the longer it is delayed to realize that the player has won the bonus, the more it will be possible to enjoy the continuous performance, but it is also possible that the player may win a specific role for which the attack mode transition lottery etc. described above are not performed. becomes more sexual.

Another event is a case where, even if an attempt is made to win a bonus in a situation where the player has won a bonus, the player cannot win due to control. That is, as already explained, in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in step S315, attraction priority is set in a situation where multiple winning combinations have been won multiple times. The priority order of this attraction priority is set so that re-gaming has the highest priority, small winnings have the next highest priority, and bonuses have the lowest priority. For example, in a situation where you have won a bonus, if you win a replay (IV = 1 to 12) or a bell role (IV = 24 to 31), the replay or small role win will take priority over the bonus win. , I can't win the bonus, but I can win the replay or the bell. In other words, even if you try to win a bonus, you will not be able to win a bonus in a game where you have won another prize, so the possibility of winning the specific prize that is the trigger event for the second advantageous state is also high. Become.

Further, the first BB and second BB bonus winnings are realized when the symbols that become the corresponding winning mode stop on the active line. The winning mode of the first BB and the winning mode of the second BB are set so that they cannot be stopped depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. That is, depending on the mode of the stop operation, even if an attempt is made to make a bonus win, the corresponding symbol may not stop, and the bonus win may not be made.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a unique control is performed when a specific winning combination, which is a trigger event related to the second advantageous state, is won during the carryover state of the first advantageous state (bonus). The configuration will be explained below.

<Stop information setting process>
In this embodiment, the mode of stop drive control when Strong Cherry 2 (IV=14) or Strong Watermelon 2, 3 (IV=17, 18) is won as a predetermined combination of specific combinations during a carryover state. change. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the stop information setting process in this embodiment. As already explained, the stop information setting process is a process performed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 16).

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not Strong Cherry 2 has been won as a result of the current lottery process. The strong cherries include strong cherry 2 with IV=14, strong cherry 1 with IV=13, strong cherry overlap 1 with IV=35, and strong cherry overlap 2 with IV=36. In step S2701, an affirmative determination is made if the strong cherry 2 out of these various strong cherries has been won. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, it is determined in step S2702 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, right reel restriction processing is executed in step S2703. If the bonus winning flag is set, right reel first restriction release processing is executed in step S2704. The restriction process in step S2703 is a process in which the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is the first control mode, and a part of the symbols that can be stopped as strong cherries are limited. The restriction cancellation process in step S2704 is a process of setting the stop drive control of the right reel 32R to the second control mode and canceling the above-mentioned partial restrictions on the symbols that can be stopped as strong cherries. In addition, other strong cherries (strong cherry 1, strong cherry overlap 1, strong cherry overlap 2) different from the above strong cherry 2 are not subject to the right reel restriction release process, and the presence or absence of the bonus winning flag (carryover status) is not performed. Regardless of whether or not the right reel is stopped in the first control mode, the right reel is always stopped in the first control mode.

FIG. 62 shows the relationship between winning modes when weak cherry, strong cherry 1 and 2, weak watermelon, and strong watermelon 1 to 3 are won. Further, FIG. 63 shows changes in the prize winning mode at the time of winning a strong cherry before and after the shift to the carryover state. In addition, in FIG. 62, only the main minor roles (27th minor role, 28th minor role, 29th minor role, 30th minor role, 41st minor role) at the time of winning each role are displayed, and the control role Other minor roles such as (32nd minor role to 35th minor role, 42nd minor role, 43rd minor role, 44th minor role) are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 17, etc., weak cherries with IV=15 and IV=37, 38 are duplicate winning combinations including the 27th minor role, 32nd minor role to 35th minor role (IV=37, 38 is the fourth minor role in this). 1BB or 2nd BB). As for the weak cherry, there is no stop limit set for any of the winning combinations, and if each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated at a timing where it can be stopped, the winning pattern will be stopped in the corresponding winning mode, and the winning of the weak cherry will not be possible. To establish. For the weak cherry, a winning is established only with the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L, and if the "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol is stopped on the active line of the left reel 32L, the other reels 32M, 32R A winning is established regardless of the stopping symbol.

A strong cherry with IV = 13, 14 or IV = 35, 36 is a duplicate combination that includes the 28th minor role, 32nd minor role to 35th minor role (IV = 35, 36 includes the 1st BB or 2nd BB) ). Among these, strong cherry 1 with IV = 13 is a combination of the 28th minor role, 32nd minor role to 35th minor role, and strong cherry 2 with IV = 14 is the minor role (the 35th minor role) of these strong cherry 1. In addition to the 28th minor role, 32nd minor role to 35th minor role), the 42nd minor role as control role 1 is set as an overlapping role.

The 28th small winning combination has multiple winning modes, with a "Cherry" symbol or "Second Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "Red Bell" symbol, and a "White Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M on the active line. A winning mode in which the symbol or "Cherry" symbol, the "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "1st Replay" symbol or the "2nd Replay" symbol stops, and the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M A winning mode is set in which when the "white BAR" symbol stops, a winning is established regardless of the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R. Among these, the winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M is a winning mode that differs depending on whether or not the restriction release process in step S2704 is performed.

In other words, the first winning mode in the 28th small winning combination is set so that the "cherry" symbols can stop in a straight line on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in a 3-bet game, so that the winning is achieved as a so-called triple cherry. has been done. In addition, the above winning mode is also referred to as the first winning mode of strong cherry in the following explanation.

The second winning mode in the 28th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R is restricted. This is how the prize is won. In this winning mode, although the 28th small winning combination is achieved regardless of the stopping symbols on the right reel 32R, stop drive control is performed so that the "white BAR" symbol does not stop on the right reel 32R. In other words, in a 3-bet game, the "White BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and the "White BAR" symbol does not stop on the right reel 32R, and the winning result is that the white BAR in the middle row is off. holds true. In addition, the above winning mode is also referred to as the second winning mode of strong cherry in the following explanation.

The third winning mode in the 28th small win is a winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the first restriction release process on the right reel 32R is This is the winning mode when the prize is won. Even in this winning mode, the 28th small winning combination is achieved regardless of the symbols stopped on the right reel 32R, but the stop drive control is performed so that the "white BAR" symbol can be stopped in the middle of the right reel 32R. In other words, in a 3-bet game, the "White BAR" symbol will stop at the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and for the right reel 32R, if you aim at the "White BAR" symbol at the middle row and perform the stop operation, the "White BAR" symbol will stop at the middle row. BAR" symbol stops and the winning is established when the middle row white BAR pattern is stopped. In addition, the above-mentioned winning mode is also referred to as the third winning mode of strong cherry in the following explanation.

By performing the right reel restriction process in step S2703, the stoppage of the third winning mode among the winning modes of the 28th small combination in Strong Cherry 2 is restricted. As a result, for the 28th small winning combination, a winning can be achieved in the first winning mode and the second winning mode. On the other hand, by performing the right reel first restriction release process in step S2704, a winning can be achieved in any of the winning modes of the 28th minor combination in Strong Cherry 2.

In other words, as shown in Figure 63, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, if you win strong cherries 1 and 2 or strong cherries duplicated 1 and 2, no matter which strong cherries you win, triple cherries If you perform a stop operation aiming at the middle row white BAR, the triple cherry will stop, and if you perform a stop operation so that the middle row white BAR is removed, the middle row white BAR will stop, but if you perform the stop operation so that the middle row white BAR is aligned, Even if this is done, the middle row white BAR alignment will not stop. In other words, if you win any strong cherry in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, that is, in a situation where there is no carryover state, even if you aim for the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the left For the reel 32L and middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol stops in the middle row, but for the right reel 32R, the "white BAR" symbol does not stop.

On the other hand, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, if you win strong cherry 2 out of the various strong cherries, if you aim at the triple cherry and perform the stop operation, the triple cherry will stop, and the middle cherry will stop. If the stop operation is performed so that the BAR is out of balance, the middle white BAR will stop coming off, and if the stop operation is performed so that the middle white BAR is aligned, the middle white BAR will stop being aligned. In other words, if you win Strong Cherry 2 in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, if you aim for the "White BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "White BAR" symbol will stop on the middle row. becomes possible.

On the other hand, even in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, if you win Strong Cherry 1 or Strong Cherry Duplicate 1 and 2 out of various strong cherries, you should perform the stop operation aiming for triple cherries. If you do this, the triple cherry will stop, and if you perform the stop operation so that the middle white BAR comes off, the middle white BAR will stop coming off, but even if you perform the stop operation so that the middle white BAR is aligned, the corresponding triple cherry will stop. The middle row white BAR arrangement does not stop. In other words, in the case of these strong cherries, the winning mode does not change regardless of the presence or absence of the bonus winning flag.

In addition, in the priority setting process of step S315, if a strong cherry 2 is won in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, the third winning mode among the first to third winning modes is prioritized and stopped. Set it so that Therefore, in such a situation, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the third winning mode can be stopped, the 28th small prize winning (strong cherry winning) will be achieved in the third winning mode, and the third If the stop operation is performed at a timing when the winning mode cannot be stopped, the 28th minor winning mode (strong cherry winning) is established in the first winning mode or the second winning mode.

Comparing the second and third winning modes of Strong Cherry, the stopping modes of the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M are common, and only the stopping mode of the right reel 32R is different. That is, in the stop information setting process, when the right reel restriction process in step S2703 is performed, the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is set to the first control mode that prevents the "white BAR" symbol from stopping, and the stop drive control in step S2704 is performed. When the right reel first restriction release process is performed, the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is set to the second control mode that allows the "white BAR" symbol to stop. The stop drive control is different, but other points are the same.

In the stop information setting process, if it is determined in step S2701 that the strong cherry 2 has not been won, the process advances to step S2705. In step S2705, it is determined whether or not Strong Watermelon 2 or 3 has been won as a result of the current lottery process. Strong Watermelon is set as Strong Watermelon 2 with IV=17, Strong Watermelon 3 with IV=18, Strong Watermelon 1 with IV=16, Strong Watermelon Duplicate 1 with IV=39, and Strong Watermelon Duplicate 2 with IV=40. has been done. In step S2705, an affirmative determination is made if Strong Watermelon 2 or Strong Watermelon 3 has been won among these various strong watermelons. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2705, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, right reel restriction processing is executed in step S2707. If the bonus winning flag is set, it is determined in step S2708 whether or not the current strong watermelon is strong watermelon 3. If it is strong watermelon 2 instead of strong watermelon 3, right reel first restriction release processing is executed in step S2709. On the other hand, if it is strong watermelon 3, right reel second restriction release processing is executed in step S2710. The restriction process in step S2707 is a process in which the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is the first control mode, and a part of the symbols that can be stopped as a strong watermelon are limited. The first restriction cancellation process in step S2709 is a process of setting the stop drive control of the right reel 32R to the second control mode and canceling the above-mentioned partial restrictions on the symbols that can be stopped as strong watermelons. The second restriction cancellation process in step S2710 is a process of setting the stop drive control of the right reel 32R to the third control mode and canceling all restrictions on symbols that can be stopped as strong watermelons. In addition, for other strong watermelons (strong watermelon 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 2) that are different from the above strong watermelons 2 and 3, the right reel restriction release process is not performed, and the presence or absence of the bonus winning flag ( Regardless of whether or not the right reel is in a carryover state, the stopping mode of the right reel is always the first control mode.

FIG. 64 shows changes in the prize winning mode at the time of winning a strong watermelon before and after the shift to the carryover state.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 62, the weak watermelon with IV=19 and IV=41, 42 is a duplicate win including the 29th minor win and the 41st minor win (IV=41, 42 is the 1BB or 41st minor win). 2BB included). Regarding the Weak Watermelon, there is no stop limit set for any of the winning combinations, and if each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated at a timing when it can be stopped, the winning mode will be stopped in the corresponding winning mode, and the Weak Watermelon winning will be won. To establish. In the weak watermelon, in a 3-bet game, the "watermelon" symbols line up and stop on the downward-sloping line L4, and a winning is achieved, or the "watermelon" symbol does not stop only on the middle reel 32M, so-called watermelon missed winnings stop and win. holds true.

The strong watermelon with IV = 16 to 18 and IV = 39, 40 is set as a duplicate combination including the 30th minor prize and the 41st minor prize (IV = 36, 37 includes the 1st BB or 2nd BB). ing. Among these, strong watermelon 1 with IV = 16 is a combination of the 30th minor role and 41st minor role, and strong watermelon 2 with IV = 17 is the minor role of these strong watermelon 1 (30th minor role, 41st minor role). In addition to the 41st minor role), this is set as an overlapping role of the 43rd minor role as the control role 2. The strong watermelon 1 with IV=18 is set as a duplicate role of the 44th small role as the control role 3 in addition to the small roles (30th minor role, 41st minor role) of the strong watermelon 1. .

The 30th small role has multiple winning modes, and on the active line, the "Watermelon" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol is stopped on the right reel 32R. A winning mode is set in which a "black BAR" symbol stops on the left reel 32L and a "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, so that a winning is achieved regardless of the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R. There is. Among these, the winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol stops on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M has a different winning mode depending on whether or not the restriction release process in step S2709 or step S2710 is performed. There is.

In other words, the first winning mode in the 30th small winning combination is that in a 3-bet game, the "watermelon" symbols can be aligned and stopped on the upper row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, so that the winning can be realized as a so-called upper row watermelon arrangement. It is set. In addition, the above winning mode is also referred to as the first winning mode of Strong Watermelon in the following explanation.

The second winning mode in the 30th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R is restricted. This is how the prize is won. In this winning mode, although the 28th small winning combination is achieved regardless of the symbols stopped on the right reel 32R, stop drive control is performed so that the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the right reel 32R. In other words, in a 3-bet game, the "black BAR" symbol forms a tenpai line on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M on the right-down line L4 and the right-up line L5, but it does not appear on either line on the right reel 32R. A winning is established if the "black BAR" does not stop and the cross black BAR misses. In addition, the above winning mode is also referred to as the second winning mode of strong watermelon in the following explanation.

The third winning mode in the 30th small win is a winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the first restriction release process on the right reel 32R is This is the winning mode when the prize is won. In this winning mode, the 28th small winning combination is achieved regardless of the symbols that stop on the right reel 32R, but on the right reel 32R, the "Black BAR" symbol can be stopped on the upper row, but it cannot be stopped on the lower row. Stop drive control is performed. In other words, in the 3-bet game, on the lower right line L4 and the upper right line L5, the "black BAR" symbol forms a tenpai line on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol is on the upper row of the right reel 32R. stops and a black BAR alignment is established on the upward-rightward line L5, while a black BAR alignment is not established on the downward-rightward line L4, and a winning is established with the stop result of a cross black BAR single alignment. Note that the above winning mode is also referred to as the third winning mode of Strong Watermelon in the following explanation.

The third winning mode in the 30th small win is a winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the second restriction release process on the right reel 32R is This is the winning mode when the prize is won. In this winning mode, the 28th small winning combination is achieved regardless of the stopping symbols on the right reel 32R, but on the right reel 32R, the stop drive control is performed so that the "black BAR" symbols can be stopped on the upper and lower rows. It will be done. In other words, in the 3-bet game, on the lower right line L4 and the upper right line L5, the "black BAR" symbol forms a tenpai line on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol appears on the upper and lower rows of the right reel 32R. ” A winning is achieved when the symbols stop and a black BAR alignment is established on both tenpai lines L4 and L5, resulting in a cross black BAR double alignment. In addition, in the following explanation, the above-mentioned winning mode will also be referred to as the fourth winning mode of Strong Watermelon.

By performing the right reel restriction process in step S2707, the suspension of the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode among the winning modes of the 30th small winning combination in Strong Watermelon 2 and 3 is restricted. As a result, for the 30th small winning combination, a winning can be achieved in the first winning mode and the second winning mode. On the other hand, by performing the right reel first restriction cancellation process in step S2709, the stop restriction on the third winning mode among the winning modes of the 30th small winning combination in Strong Watermelon 2 is canceled. As a result, for the 30th small winning combination of Strong Watermelon 2, a winning can be achieved in any of the first to third winning modes. Then, by performing the right reel second restriction release process in step S2710, the 30th minor combination in Strong Watermelon 3 can be won in any winning mode.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 64, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, if you win strong watermelon 1 to 3 or strong watermelon duplication 1 and 2, no matter which strong watermelon it is, the upper watermelon If you perform a stop operation aiming for alignment, the upper watermelon alignment will stop, and if you perform a stop operation to make the cross black BAR come off, the cross black BAR will stop coming off, but if the cross black BAR is single aligned or double aligned. Even if a stop operation is performed so that the cross black BAR has a single set and a double set, the cross black BAR does not stop. In other words, if you win any strong watermelon in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, that is, in a situation where there is no carryover state, even if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the left On the reel 32L and middle reel 32M, the "black BAR" symbol stops and becomes a double tenpai, but on the right reel 32R, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop.

On the other hand, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, if you win Strong Watermelon 2 out of the various strong watermelons, if you perform the stop operation aiming at the upper row of watermelons, the upper row of watermelons will stop, and the cross will stop. If a stop operation is performed so that the black BAR is removed, the cross black BAR is stopped, and if a stop operation is performed so that the cross black BAR is aligned with singles, the cross black BAR is stopped with singles. However, when the strong watermelon 2 is won, the cross black BAR double alignment does not stop even if the stop operation is performed to make the cross black BAR double alignment even in the carryover state. In other words, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, that is, when you win Strong Watermelon 2 in a carryover state, if you aim for the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, you will get a cross black BAR single. It is possible to stop the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the symbol appears.

Then, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, if you win strong watermelon 3 out of various strong watermelons, if you perform the stop operation aiming at the upper row of watermelons, the upper row of watermelons will stop, and the cross will stop. If you perform a stop operation so that the black BAR is off, the cross black BAR will stop coming off, and if you perform a stop operation so that the cross black BAR is single, the cross black BAR single will stop, and the cross black BAR will be double aligned. If the stop operation is performed so that the cross black BAR double arrangement is stopped. In other words, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, that is, if you win Strong Watermelon 3 in a carryover state, if you aim for the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, you will get a double cross black BAR. It is possible to stop the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the symbol appears.

On the other hand, even in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, if you win Strong Watermelon 1 or Strong Watermelon Dual 1 and 2 out of various strong watermelons, you should perform a stop operation aiming to collect all the watermelons in the upper row. If you do this, the upper row of watermelons will stop, and if you perform a stop operation so that the cross black BAR comes off, the cross black BAR will stop coming off, but even if you perform the stop operation so that the cross black BAR becomes a single row. The cross black BAR single set does not stop, and even if a stopping operation is performed to make the cross black BAR double set, the cross black BAR double set does not stop. In other words, in the case of these strong watermelons, the winning mode does not change regardless of the presence or absence of the bonus winning flag.

In addition, in the priority setting process of step S315, if the bonus winning flag is set and you win Strong Watermelon 2, the third winning mode among the first to third winning modes is prioritized and stopped. Set it so that Therefore, in such a situation, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the third winning mode can be stopped, a strong watermelon winning will be achieved in the third winning mode, and the timing when the third winning mode cannot be stopped. When the stop operation is performed in , a strong watermelon win is established in the first winning mode or the second winning mode.

Also, in the priority setting process, if you win Strong Watermelon 3 in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, the fourth winning mode among the first to fourth winning modes will be prioritized and stopped. setting, and then setting the third winning mode as the next priority. Therefore, in such a situation, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the fourth winning mode can be stopped, a strong watermelon winning will be achieved in the fourth winning mode, and the timing when the fourth winning mode cannot be stopped. If the stop operation is performed in the third winning mode, a strong watermelon prize will be achieved in the third winning mode, and if the stopping operation is performed at a timing when the fourth and third winning modes cannot be stopped, the first winning mode will be A strong watermelon prize is established in the winning mode or the second winning mode.

Comparing the second to fourth winning modes of Strong Watermelon, the stopping modes of the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M are common, and only the stopping mode of the right reel 32R is different. That is, in the stop information setting process, when the right reel restriction process in step S2707 is performed, the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is set to the first control mode that prevents the "black BAR" symbol from stopping in the upper to lower rows. , when the right reel first restriction release process in step S2709 is performed, the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is such that the "black BAR" symbol in the upper row can be stopped, and the "black BAR" symbol in the lower row cannot be stopped. When the right reel second restriction release process in step S2710 is performed, the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is set so that the "black BAR" symbols can be stopped in the upper and lower rows. The stop drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is different in that the third control mode is used, but the other points are common.

After performing any of steps S2703, S2704, S2707, S2709, and S2710, or after making a negative determination in step S2705, the process advances to step S2711. In step S2711, information on the stop mode that can be stopped set in each process is stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106, and then the stop information setting process is ended. In the priority setting process of step S315 in the lottery process, the information stored in the stop information storage area 106b is used to set the winning combinations, their winning modes, and their priorities.

As described above, the winning mode of Strong Cherry and Strong Watermelon changes depending on whether or not there is a carryover state. Here, we will explain the recommended game modes to achieve winnings for each small winning combination including the specific winning combination.

Among the winning combinations in each game, the winning combinations in which so-called missed prizes that cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. More specifically, as already explained, strong cherries 1 and 2 and strong cherries duplication 1 and 2 are the winning combinations of the 28th minor role and any of the 31st minor role to the 35th minor role. The 28th small role symbol, 31st minor role symbol to 35th minor role symbol on the reel 32L are the "cherry" symbol, the "second replay" symbol, and the "black BAR" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, the 7th "Red Bell" symbol to the 11th "1st Replay" symbol, the 19th "1st Replay" symbol to the 20th "White Bell" symbol are on the left reel 32L. If the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the upper row is reached, the above-mentioned 28th small role symbol, the 31st to 35th minor role symbol "Cherry" symbol, "2nd Replay" symbol, and " None of the "Black BAR" symbols can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong cherry combination will be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a role that can win any of the 27th small role, 31st small role to 35th small role, and the 27th small role symbol and the 31st minor role symbol to the 31st minor role symbol on the left reel 32L. The 35 small winning symbols are a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 7th "Red Bell" symbol to the 20th "White Bell" symbol reaches the upper row of the left reel 32L, the above-mentioned None of the 27th small role symbol, the 31st to 35th minor role symbol, the "cherry" symbol, and the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak cherry combination will be missed.

Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 and Strong Watermelon Duplication 1 and 2 are winning hands that can win either the 30th minor role or the 41st minor role, and the 30th minor role symbol and the 41st minor role on the left reel 32L The symbols are a "watermelon" symbol and a "black bar" symbol. In this case, in the 3 bet game, the 9th "Red 7" symbol to the 11th "1st Replay" symbol, the 19th "1st Replay" symbol to the 3rd "White Bell" symbol are on the left reel 32L. If the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the upper row is reached, both the 30th and 41st small role symbols, the "Watermelon" symbol and the "Black BAR" symbol, are stopped on the active line. I can't. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a win that can win either the 29th small role or the 41st small role, and the 29th small role symbol and the 41st minor role symbol on the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 9th "Red 7" symbol to the 3rd "White Bell" symbol reaches the upper row of the left reel 32L, the 29th The small winning symbol and the 41st small winning symbol "Watermelon" symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon winning combination will be missed.

Then, if you operate the left reel 32L to stop while leaving the possibility of winning for any of these winning hands, the 4th "Cherry" symbol to the 6th "2nd Replay" symbol will be on the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation when the upper stage is reached. In the following explanation, the operation mode of the left reel 32L will also be referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a missed draw, and each of the above-mentioned operation modes that cause a missed draw will be referred to as a non-specific operation. Also referred to as a mode (second operation mode).

When the left reel 32L is operated in a specific operation mode, if any of the strong cherries is won, a prize will be achieved in the second and third winning modes of the first to third winning modes of the above strong cherries. Instead, the prize will be won in the first prize winning mode. Similarly, when the left reel 32L is operated in a specific operation mode, when any strong watermelon is won, the second to fourth winning modes of the above-mentioned strong watermelon are The prize is not won, and the prize is won in the first winning mode. In other words, in the case of winning these strong cherries and strong watermelons, if you try to win in each winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, such stopping operation mode becomes a non-specific operation mode, It is not possible to follow up when weak cherries and weak watermelons are won, and these weak cherries and weak watermelons are missed.

Furthermore, in each winning mode where the "Black BAR" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, if you try to win a strong cherry or strong watermelon, one of the winning combinations of strong cherry or strong watermelon will be missed on the middle reel 32M. can also occur. Specifically, when the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L, the 28th small winning symbol corresponding to the strong cherry on the middle reel 32M is the "white BAR" symbol. On the other hand, when the "Black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L, the 30th small winning symbol corresponding to the strong watermelon on the middle reel 32M is the "Black BAR" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol are arranged at least four symbols apart. Therefore, for middle reel 32M, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the "white BAR" symbol can be stopped on the active line, the "black BAR" symbol cannot be stopped on the active line, and the "black BAR" symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. ” If the stop operation is performed at a timing when the symbol can be stopped on the active line, the “White BAR” symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. In other words, if you stop the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and then aim for the symbol that corresponds to a strong cherry prize on the middle reel 32M, you will miss the strong watermelon and aim for the symbol that corresponds to a strong watermelon prize. As a result, strong cherries are left uncollected.

Based on the above relationship, normally, in order to prevent each winning combination from being missed, the left reel 32L is stopped in a specific operation mode, and the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R are stopped depending on the number of stop results. It is recommended to perform the stop operation. In other words, as long as the stop operation is performed in the recommended specific operation mode, the second and third winning modes of strong cherry and the second to fourth winning modes of strong watermelon will not appear.

<Special notification processing>
Next, processing related to notification when a specific winning combination is won will be explained. Notification at the time of winning a specific winning combination is executed in the special notification process in the specific winning notification process (FIG. 52). As already explained, the specific winning combination notification process is a process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65(a), in the special notification process, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not there is a carryover state. Whether or not the carryover state is present can be determined based on whether a carryover command (see step S613) has been received from the main control device 101. If it is determined that there is no carryover state, processing for setting a chance notification effect is performed in step S2802. In the chance notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the characters "Chance!!" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and characters with exclamation marks are displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and displayed accordingly. In addition, in the chance notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "cue").

In the chance notification performance, although it is suggested that the current winning combination is one of the specific combinations, it is set so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which specific combination it is. In other words, if a chance notification effect is performed, the winning combination for this game is likely to be either a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, or a weak watermelon. It is impossible to determine whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon, etc. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the player must move the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode so as not to miss any of the specific winning combinations. The operation will be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2801 and the specific combination is won during the carryover state, the process advances to step S2803. In step S2803, it is determined whether a strong cherry or strong watermelon has been won as a specific combination. If the winner is not a strong cherry or a strong watermelon, the process advances to step S2802, and control is performed to perform a chance notification effect. If the winner is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon, the process advances to step S2804, and a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to issue a push-pull instruction. In this lottery process, the eye push instruction lottery table stored in advance in the various table storage areas 182a is acquired, and counters for lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 183b, and the second and third winning modes of strong cherries are acquired. (FIG. 63) and the second to fourth winning modes of strong watermelon (FIG. 64) are selected by lottery to determine whether or not to win.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), the eye-pull instruction lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the eye-pull instruction notification execution lottery differs depending on the winning combination and the set value for changing the ball payout rate. ing.

The case where the current winning combination is Strong Cherry 1 is the case where a winning is achieved in the first winning mode and the second winning mode of Strong Cherry, but a winning is not achieved in the third winning mode. In other words, when it is a strong cherry 1 in a carryover state, even if you aim for the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the middle white BAR will not be aligned, and the middle white BAR will be off. This is the case where the winning is achieved. In the eye-pull instruction lottery table, if it is a strong cherry 1, it is set not to win the eye-pull instruction notification lottery regardless of the set value.

The case where the current winning combination is Strong Cherry 2 is the case where a prize is achieved in any of the first to third winning modes of Strong Cherry. In other words, if it is a strong cherry 2 in a carryover state, if you perform a stop operation aiming at the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a prize will be achieved in a stop mode where the middle row white BAR is aligned. This is a case where it is possible to do so. In the eye push instruction lottery table, if the strong cherry is 2, if the set value is 1 to 3, you will not win the eye push instruction notification lottery, and if the set value is 4 to 6, you will not win the eye push instruction notification lottery. It is set so that there is a 50% chance of winning the eye-catching instruction notification lottery.

The case where the winning combination this time is Strong Watermelon 1 means that a prize is achieved in the first winning mode and second winning mode of Strong Watermelon, but it is not possible to win in the third winning mode and fourth winning mode. This is a case where this does not hold true. In other words, if it is a strong watermelon 1 during a carryover state, even if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the cross black BAR single alignment/double alignment will not occur, and the cross black BAR will miss. This is the case where a winning is achieved in the stopping mode. In the eye-pull instruction lottery table, it is set so that if it is the strong watermelon 1, it will not win the eye-pull instruction notification lottery regardless of the set value.

The case where the winning combination this time is Strong Watermelon 2 is the case where a winning is achieved in the first winning mode to the third winning mode of Strong Watermelon, but a winning is not achieved in the fourth winning mode. In other words, if it is a strong watermelon 2 in a carryover state, if you perform a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, it will not be a double cross black BAR, but a cross black BAR This is a case in which it is possible to win a prize in a stopping manner in which a single match is made. In the eye push instruction lottery table, if the strong watermelon is 2, if the set value is 1 or 2, you will not win the eye push instruction notification lottery, and if the set value is 3 to 6, you will not win the eye push instruction notification lottery. It is set so that there is a 50% chance of winning the eye-catching instruction notification lottery.

The case where the current winning combination is Strong Watermelon 3 is the case where a prize is achieved in any of the first to fourth winning modes of Strong Watermelon. In other words, if it is a strong watermelon 3 in a carryover state, if you perform a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, you will win a prize in a stop mode where a cross black BAR double aligns. This is a case where it is possible to make this happen. In the eye push instruction lottery table, if the strong watermelon is 3, if the set value is 1 to 5, you will not win the eye push instruction notification lottery, and if the set value is 6, you will win 50%. It is set so that the probability of winning the eye-catching instruction notification lottery is .

After executing the lottery process in step S2804, it is determined in step S2805 whether or not a winner has been won in the lottery process. If the player has not won, a process for setting a comprehensive chance notification effect is performed in step S2806. The comprehensive chance notification performance is different from the above-mentioned chance notification performance, and is a performance to notify that a strong cherry or strong watermelon has been won in a specific role. The possibility of a weak watermelon is eliminated.

In the comprehensive chance notification performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), an image of a hub character and a mongoose character fighting while intertwined is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. Here, the habu and the mongoose are known as natural enemies, and their strength is comparable to each other. Therefore, in a fight between a habu and a mongoose, there is a possibility that either one will win. In this embodiment, the hub corresponds to the strong cherry and the mongoose corresponds to the strong watermelon, and in the comprehensive chance notification production, in the battle between the hub and the mongoose, either the strong cherry or the strong watermelon can win a prize. It corresponds to the fact that there is a gender.

In the comprehensive chance notification performance, along with the image of the battle between the habu and the mongoose, an image indicating that you should aim for the "black BAR" or "white BAR" is also displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, in the comprehensive chance notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Aim for it" in a male voice).

As described above, in the comprehensive chance notification performance, it is announced that a strong cherry or a strong watermelon has been won, so the possibility of a weak cherry or a weak watermelon is eliminated. On that point, it is also possible to stop the left reel 32L not in the specific operation mode described above, but in a non-specific operation mode aiming at the third winning mode of strong cherry or the third and fourth winning modes of strong watermelon. It is. However, as mentioned above, the third winning mode for Strong Cherry and the third and fourth winning modes for Strong Watermelon are as follows: Aim for the "white BAR" or "black BAR" on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. Depending on whether you aim for it or not, there is a possibility that you will miss out on the other prize you did not aim for.

In addition, if you stop the "white BAR" or "black BAR" on the middle reel 32M after the left reel 32L stops, the remaining reel (right reel 32R) will be directed to aim at the high-temperature symbols on the left and inside. Switch. If the original comprehensive chance notification effect remains unchanged, that is, if the effect intended to make you aim for the "white BAR" or "black BAR" is displayed as is, even if you make the same color BAR symbol tenpai, it will be different on the remaining reels. This is because if you aim for the colored BAR symbols, you may lose your chance to get all the white and black bars.

If it is determined in step S2805 that the eye-pull instruction lottery has been won, the process advances to step S2807. In step S2807, it is determined whether the strong cherry has been won. If the strong cherry has been won, the comprehensive chance notification effect is set in step S2808. This process is similar to step S2806 above. That is, on the auxiliary display section 65, a representation of the battle between the habu and the mongoose is performed.

In the subsequent step S2809, a process is performed to set the white BAR press instruction notification effect as the first stop OFF time effect. The first stop OFF effect is the effect executed based on the stop OFF operation (release of the press operation of the stop switches 42 to 44) of the reel to be stopped first in each stop operation effect setting process (FIG. 48). It is.

In the white BAR push instruction notification performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the auxiliary display section 65 shows that the hub has won as a result of the battle between the hub and the mongoose in the comprehensive chance notification performance. Displays an enlarged image of the hub character. Furthermore, a push instruction image for aiming at the "white BAR" symbol is also displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, at the time of the comprehensive chance notification, if the left reel 32L is stopped with the aim of the third winning mode of the strong cherry or the third and fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon, instead of the specific operation mode, , it is possible to prevent the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R from missing out, and it is possible to win a strong cherry in the third winning mode.

In each stop operation effect setting process (FIG. 48), in step S2208, it is determined whether a white BAR eye press instruction notification effect is set as a special notification. If the white BAR eye press instruction notification effect is set, in step S2210, a "white BAR" symbol is displayed in the middle of the reel that was stopped by the stop ON operation immediately before the current stop OFF operation, that is, the first stop reel. Determine whether it is stopped. If the "white BAR" symbol is not stopped in the middle of the first stop reel, the process of setting the normal OFF time performance in step S2209 is performed, and then the performance setting process for each stop operation is ended. In this case, the display effect on the auxiliary display section 65 continues to be the comprehensive chance notification effect that was set at the start of the game.

When the "white BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of the first stop reel, in step S2211, a setting is made so that the white BAR eye press instruction notification effect is performed as a special notification. In other words, even if the White BAR push instruction notification effect is set as a special notification for the 1st stop OFF effect, if the "White BAR" symbol is not stopped in the middle of the 1st stop reel, In this case, the white BAR push instruction notification performance is not executed, and the comprehensive chance notification performance continues. In other words, even if you win in the eye-pressing instruction lottery (step S2804), for example, you can perform a stop operation on the left reel 32L in a specific operation mode, aiming at the "white BAR" symbol and performing a stop operation. If this is not done, the white BAR push instruction notification effect will not be executed.

If it is determined in step S2807 that the strong cherry has not been won, it is determined in step S2810 whether or not the strong watermelon has been won. If the strong watermelon has been won, the comprehensive chance notification effect is set in step S2811. This process is similar to step S2806 above. That is, on the auxiliary display section 65, a representation of the battle between the habu and the mongoose is performed.

In the subsequent step S2812, processing is performed to set the black BAR eye press instruction notification effect as the first stop OFF time effect. In the black BAR push instruction notification performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the auxiliary display section 65 shows that the mongoose has won as a result of the battle between the hub and the mongoose in the comprehensive chance notification performance. Displays an enlarged image of the mongoose character. In addition, a push instruction image for aiming at the "black BAR" is also displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, at the time of the comprehensive chance notification, if the left reel 32L is stopped with the aim of the third winning mode of the strong cherry or the third and fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon, instead of the specific operation mode, , it is possible to prevent the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R from missing out, and it is possible to win strong watermelons in the third and fourth winning modes.

In each stop operation performance setting process (FIG. 48), in step S2208, it is determined whether a black BAR eye press instruction notification performance is set as a special notification. If the black BAR eye-pressing instruction notification effect is set, in step S2210, a " It is determined whether the "Black BAR" symbol is stopped or not. If the "black BAR" symbol is not stopped on any of the upper to lower rows of the first stop reel, perform the process of setting the normal OFF effect in step S2209, and then perform the effect setting process for each stop operation. finish. In this case, the display effect on the auxiliary display section 65 continues to be the comprehensive chance notification effect that was set at the start of the game.

When the "black BAR" symbol is stopped at any of the upper to lower rows of the first stop reel, in step S2211, a setting is made so that the black BAR eye press instruction notification effect is performed as a special notification. In other words, even if the black BAR push instruction notification effect is set as a special notification for the first stop OFF effect, if the "Black BAR" symbol is not stopped on the first stop reel, The black BAR push instruction notification performance is not executed, and the comprehensive chance notification performance continues. In other words, even if you win in the eye-press instruction lottery (step S2804), for example, you can perform a stop operation on the left reel 32L in a specific operation mode, aiming at the "black BAR" symbol and performing a stop operation. If this is not done, the black BAR push instruction notification effect will not be executed.

After executing any one of steps S2802, S2806, S2809, and S2812, or when a negative determination is made in step S2810, the special notification process ends.

That is, in a game in which a strong cherry or a strong watermelon is won in a carryover state, a comprehensive chance notification effect occurs. Then, when the first stop of the game is OFF, the comprehensive chance notification performance may change to a white BAR push instruction notification effect or a black BAR push instruction notification effect. The case where the performance changes to the eye press instruction notification effect is the case where the eye press instruction lottery in step S2804 is won, and the probability of winning in such a lottery differs depending on the winning combination and the set value.

For example, when a comprehensive chance notification effect occurs, if the left reel 32L is stopped in the above-mentioned specific operation mode and a white BAR push instruction notification effect occurs, the lottery results of this game will be Strong Cherry 1, Strong Watermelon. It is determined that it is a strong cherry 2 instead of 1 to 3, and it is determined that the set value is 4 to 6 with a probability of 50%. In other words, when the comprehensive chance notification performance changes to the white BAR push instruction notification performance, that is, when the battle between the hub and the mongoose is settled with the hub winning, it is confirmed that the set value is not 1 to 3. .

In addition, when the comprehensive chance notification effect occurs, if the left reel 32L is stopped in the above-mentioned specific operation mode and the black BAR push instruction notification effect occurs, the lottery result of this game will be Strong Cherry 1, 2, It is determined that the watermelon is strong watermelon 2 and 3 instead of strong watermelon 1, and it is determined that the set value is not 1 and 2. In this case, if you stop the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R while aiming at the "black BAR" and the strong watermelon wins in the third winning mode, there is a 50% probability that the settings 3 to 6 will be used. It is determined that something is true. Further, when a strong watermelon is won in the fourth winning mode, it is determined that the set value is 6. In other words, when the comprehensive chance notification performance changes to the black BAR push instruction notification performance, that is, when the battle between the hub and the mongoose ends with the mongoose winning, it is determined that the set value is 3 or more. , When a strong watermelon prize is established with a double cross black BAR, it is determined that the set value is 6. In other words, if a battle between a habu and a mongoose occurs, people will pay attention to the battle in the hope that one of them will win, and if the mongoose wins, they will pay attention to the stop roll. The points to be played are multi-staged to increase interest.

In this way, in the carryover state where the bonus winning flag is set, even if you win Strong Cherry 1 and 2 or Strong Watermelon 1 to 3, which were supposed to be the trigger for the attack mode transition lottery, etc. As a substitute for not performing such a transition lottery, etc., a setting value is suggested.

However, if you have not won the eye-catching instruction lottery and the comprehensive chance notification effect occurs, even if you aim for the third winning mode of strong cherry or the third and fourth winning mode of strong watermelon, The eye press instruction notification effect is not executed. For example, if you perform a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol and "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L when a comprehensive chance notification effect occurs, the "white BAR" symbol will stop in the middle row and a strong cherry will be displayed. Although there is still room for winning in the second and third winning modes and winning strong watermelons in the second to fourth winning modes, it is not possible to win strong cherries in the first winning mode. It becomes impossible to win a strong watermelon in the first winning mode. In this case, if the push instruction notification effect does not occur after the comprehensive chance notification effect, if you aim for the "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, you will not be able to pull in the "black BAR" symbol, and if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol, you will not be able to pull in the "black BAR" symbol. Since the "White BAR" symbol cannot be drawn in, either the strong cherry or the strong watermelon may be missed. On that point, if you do not want to miss out on winnings, the eye push instruction notification effect will not occur and the setting value will not be suggested, but even when the comprehensive chance notification effect occurs, the left reel 32L should be operated in a specific manner. All you have to do is stop it at .

Further, in a situation where a strong cherry or a strong watermelon has been won during the carryover state, it is also possible to first stop the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R instead of the left reel 32L. For example, if you want to win a strong cherry in the third winning mode, it is necessary to perform a stop operation at a timing when the "white BAR" symbol can be stopped in the middle row of the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R. In this case, regarding the right reel 32R, if you stop the right reel 32R first, the "White BAR" symbol will not stop in the middle row ("Red Bell") even if you win Strong Cherry 2 during the carryover state. ” symbol does not stop at the lower row), the “cherry” symbol, the “first replay” symbol, or the “second replay” symbol stops at the lower row. Therefore, it is not possible to win a prize in the third winning mode. In this case, even if the player wins the eye push instruction lottery, the white bar eye push instruction notification effect does not occur.

In addition, regarding the middle reel 32M, if you first stop the middle reel 32M when winning a strong cherry and aim for the "white BAR" symbol, the "white BAR" symbol can be stopped in the middle of the middle reel 32M. , In this case, the possibility of winning a strong watermelon is eliminated. However, since the "white BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of the first stop reel, the white BAR push instruction notification performance is performed as the above-mentioned special notification. On the other hand, if you win a strong watermelon and perform the stop operation at a timing when the "white BAR" symbol can be stopped on the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R as described above, the stop operation at such timing will result in a strong watermelon. The "black BAR" symbol, which is the third and fourth winning mode, cannot be stopped in the upper to lower rows. In this case, for example, on the middle reel 32M, the 19th "red bell" symbol placed one place downstream of the 18th "white BAR" symbol stops in the middle row, and the strong watermelon becomes the first winning prize. Although there is still room for winning in this manner, since the "black BAR" symbol is not stopped on the first stop reel, the black BAR push instruction notification effect does not occur. In addition, on the right reel 32R, the 17th "Red Bell" symbol placed one spot upstream of the 18th "White BAR" symbol, or the 20th "Red Bell" symbol placed two spots downstream of the 18th "White BAR" symbol. The symbol stops at the bottom row, and there is still room for the strong watermelon to win in the first winning mode, but since the "Black BAR" symbol does not stop on the first stop reel, the black BAR eye press instruction notification effect is Does not occur.

In addition, if you want to stop the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R first and win strong watermelon in the third or fourth winning mode, you can stop the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R with "Black BAR". ” It is necessary to perform a stop operation at a timing when the symbol can be stopped. In this case, if the "Black BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R, the possibility of winning a strong cherry is eliminated, and since the "Black BAR" symbol stops on the first stop reel, the above special notification is A black bar push instruction notification performance is performed. On the other hand, if you win a strong cherry and perform a stop operation at a timing when the "black BAR" symbol can be stopped on the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R as described above, the stop operation at such timing will cause the 3rd strong cherry to stop. The "white BAR" symbol, which is the winning mode, cannot be stopped in the middle row. In this case, for example, on the middle reel 32M, the 11th "cherry" symbol placed three spots downstream of the 8th "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row, and the strong cherry becomes the first winning mode. Although there is still room for winning, the "white BAR" symbol is not stopped on the first stopped reel, so the white BAR push instruction notification effect does not occur. In addition, on the right reel 32R, the 6th "1st Replay" symbol placed one spot upstream of the 7th "Black BAR" symbol, or the 11th "1st Replay" symbol placed 4 spots downstream of the 7th "Black BAR" symbol. The "Replay" symbol stops at the bottom row, and there is still room for the strong cherry to win in the first winning mode, but since the "White BAR" symbol does not stop on the first stop reel, the White BAR push instruction notification is issued. No performance occurs.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In a carryover state where the execution of transition drawings to attack mode, etc. and additional drawings such as attack mode are restricted, the specific combinations (Strong Cherry 1, 2, Strong Watermelon 1-3) that trigger such transition drawings and additional drawings are restricted. In the case of winning, the winning can be achieved with a different stop result compared to the case where there is no carryover state, so the gameplay in the carryover state is improved, and the transfer lottery and additional lottery etc. are carried out. It becomes possible to reduce the sense of loss caused by not having one.

More specifically, in the case of winning a specific combination that triggers the transfer lottery or additional lottery in the carryover state, the set value is suggested as a presentation of useful information to the player, so the so-called loss loss Even if the event occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed.

When a specific winning combination is won during a carryover state, the stopping number at the time of winning is made to be different compared to a state where there is no carryover state. Specifically, when winning a strong cherry, before the transition to the carryover state, a winning is achieved in the first winning mode and the second winning mode, but a winning is not achieved in the third winning mode (stopping) do not). On the other hand, when the state shifts to a carryover state, a prize can be won in any of the first winning mode to the third winning mode. In addition, when winning a strong watermelon, before the transition to the carryover state, the winning is achieved in the first winning mode and the second winning mode, but the winning is not possible in the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode. Does not hold (does not stop). On the other hand, when the state shifts to a carryover state, a winning can be achieved in any of the first winning mode to the fourth winning mode. By doing this, it becomes possible to notify that a specific winning combination has been won during the carryover state through a change in the number of stopped rolls.

When a strong cherry or strong watermelon is won before shifting to a carryover state, even if a stopping operation is performed aiming at a winning mode that can be stopped during the carryover state, these winning modes are not stopped. This ensures the effectiveness of the stopping number changing depending on the state.

Regardless of whether there is a carryover state or not, winnings in the second to fourth winning modes of Strong Cherry and Strong Watermelon are determined by the stopping symbols on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M, regardless of the stopping symbols on the right reel 32R. It was structured as follows. By doing this, when changing the above-mentioned stopping number, there is no need to change the winning mode for establishing a winning, and the amount of data stored can be reduced. In addition, if the right reel 32R is also configured to determine the winning pattern by determining the stopped symbols, for example, even though a strong cherry has been won, the symbol corresponding to the strong cherry appears when the right reel 32R is stopped. A special configuration is required, such as controlling the system so that it does not stop. In this regard, by not using the right reel 32R for winning determination as described above, no inconvenience will occur even if the stopping manner of the right reel 32R when winning a strong cherry or strong watermelon is changed depending on the state.

When strong cherries 1 and 2 are won during a carryover state, strong cherry 1 results in the middle white BAR being off, and strong cherry 2 results in the middle white BAR being aligned. Also, if you win Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 during the carryover state, Strong Watermelon 1 will result in a cross black BAR missing, Strong Watermelon 2 will result in a single cross black BAR, and strong watermelon 3 will result in a double cross black BAR. I made it. In this way, since the stopping number is made different depending on the winning result, the winning result and the winning mode are respectively associated with each other. This prevents the occurrence of winnings in different winning modes even in the same state for one winning result, which is preferable from the viewpoint of fairness of the game.

Even if you win Strong Cherry 2, if you fail to press the "White BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R, you will win with a stop roll that misses the middle white BAR, the same as when you win Strong Cherry 1. was established. Also, even if you win Strong Watermelon 3, if you fail to press the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R, the stop roll will be a cross black BAR single, the same as when you win Strong Watermelon 2. Also, the same as when winning Strong Watermelon 1, winning is now possible with a stop roll that results in a cross black BAR being missed. By doing this, it is possible to avoid missing out if the eye-pushing operation fails, and it is also made difficult to distinguish whether the winning result was Strong Cherry 1 or Strong Cherry 2, etc. be able to. Therefore, the level of difficulty of the eye-pressing operation and the game of determining the winning combination are balanced, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

In the carryover state, in addition to the winning flags corresponding to strong cherries 1 and 2 and strong watermelons 1 to 3, bonus winning flags such as the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set. In other words, depending on whether or not there is a carryover state, the types of winning flags at the time of winning these specific winning combinations differ, and the results that can be achieved in the game vary. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of stored data compared to a configuration in which winning modes are set for each state.

If you win a specific winning combination during the carryover state, if you perform a stop operation aiming at the third winning mode of Strong Cherry or the third or fourth winning mode of Strong Watermelon, if you have won the eye push instruction lottery, A push instruction notification performance corresponding to the winning result is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed aiming at such a winning mode, a strong cherry or a strong watermelon will not be missed. Since the winning probability of this eye-pressing instruction lottery is made different depending on the setting value, it is possible to infer the setting value by the occurrence of the eye-pressing instruction notification effect.

When a specific winning combination is won during a carryover state, if the left reel 32L is operated to stop in a specific operation mode in which no winnings occur, no setting value is suggested. By doing this, a game is added in which the player selects which target to perform the stop operation based on the balance between the risk of missing out and the benefit of setting value suggestion. This allows for diversification of games during the carryover state.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, based on winning Strong Cherries 1 and 2 or Strong Watermelons 1 to 3 during the carryover state, it is possible to stop a stop roll that is different from the stop roll before the carryover state. The configuration is such that a benefit different from that suggested by the set value is given by using this. FIG. 69(a) is a flowchart showing the winning point process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81. The winning point process is a process that is started as one process in the other processes (step S1711) in the effect setting process (FIG. 42).

In step S2901, it is determined whether a full stop command has been received. As the full stop command, a winning result command set in the reel control process (FIG. 18) of the main controller 101 is used. If the winning result command has not been received, the winning point process is immediately terminated. If it has been received, the process advances to step S2902.

In step S2902, the prize winning result of the current game is grasped. In the following step S2903, the content of the effect being executed in the current game is grasped. For example, if a continuous performance is being executed, it is determined whether or not it was the final game of the continuous performance, and whether the continuous performance ended with success or failure is also determined. In the following step S2904, processing is executed to obtain point tables that can be stored in the various table storage areas 182a.

An example of the point table is shown in FIG. 69(b). The point table is set so that different results are awarded depending on winning results and performance details. For example, if the "1st Replay" symbol and the "2nd Replay" symbol are aligned and a re-game winning is achieved, "1" point will be added, and if the "Red Bell" symbol and the "White Bell" symbol are aligned Points are set according to the winning combination and winning mode, such as ``3'' points are added if a winning is achieved. In other words, if any of the "replay" symbols do not line up and a replay win is achieved, or if the "bell" symbols do not line up and a bell win is achieved, the winnings will be greater than if the winning symbols were aligned. 0 points are given as fewer points (no points are given).

In this case, if the "cherry" symbols line up and a cherry prize is established, "15" points will be added, while if the "white BAR" symbols line up and a cherry prize is established, "40" points will be added. The points awarded are set to be different depending on the first winning mode (all cherries) and the third winning mode (all middle white BARs) when winning a strong cherry. There is. In addition, if the "Watermelon" symbols line up and a watermelon prize is established, "20" points will be added, while if the "Black BAR" symbols are aligned and a watermelon prize is established, "50" points will be added. Points will be awarded in the first winning mode (all watermelons in the upper row) and in the third and fourth winning modes (cross black BAR single set, double set) when winning a strong watermelon. are set differently. In addition, as a winning mode when a strong watermelon is won, in the fourth winning mode of cross black BAR double matching, twice as many points as in the third winning mode are awarded.

In the point table, points are set depending on the content of the performance, in addition to the above-mentioned winning manner. For example, it is set so that "10" points are added if the continuous performance ends in failure.

Note that the point table may be configured to include not only information for adding points but also information for subtracting points. For example, if a strong cherry is won in the second winning mode when winning a strong cherry (the middle white BAR is missing), "5" points will be subtracted, and if the second winning mode is when winning a watermelon (the cross black BAR is missing) ), if a strong watermelon prize is achieved, "10" points may be subtracted. Furthermore, when the continuous performance ends successfully, "5" points may be subtracted. The values of these points to be added and subtracted are not limited to those mentioned above, and the relationship between addition and subtraction may be reversed. For example, when winning a strong cherry, if a strong cherry is won in the second winning mode, points are added, and if a strong cherry is won in the third winning mode, points are subtracted. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which points are subtracted when the continuous performance ends in failure, and points are added when the continuous performance ends in success.

In step S2905, processing is performed to calculate points to be added based on the information grasped in steps S2902 and S2903 and the point table obtained in step S2904. Then, based on the calculation result, point addition processing is executed in step S2906. In the point addition process, a value corresponding to the calculation result in step S2905 is added to the point counter set in the various counter areas 183b. Note that the value of the point counter is not reset simply by turning the power ON/OFF, but is reset based on the RAM clearing process or the change/reset of the set value.

An example of an effect based on points being added by the point addition process will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stops, and the "white BAR" symbols stop aligned in the middle row, and a strong cherry prize is achieved in the third winning mode. In this case, in the above point addition process, "40" points are added. As shown in FIG. 70(a), the auxiliary display section 65 is provided with a bonus point display area BPE that displays bonus points BP, which is the total number of points corresponding to the value of the point counter. The bonus point display area BPE is arranged, for example, at a corner of the auxiliary display section 65, and is set in an area that does not overlap with performances in each game such as continuous performances, especially press order notification performances. When "40" points are added to the bonus point BP based on a strong cherry win as shown in FIG. 70(b), the character image "+40" is added to the bonus point from the bottom where each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is arranged. An effect of moving to the point display area BPE is performed.

In step S2907, it is determined whether or not the points have reached a predetermined value (for example, "200" points) or more that is eligible for awarding benefits. If it is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the winning point process is immediately terminated. If the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a process for awarding the award is executed in step S2908, and a process for subtracting the points for the award (points for the predetermined value) from the point counter is executed in step S2909, and then when the award is won. End point processing.

An example of an effect in which a benefit is given based on points exceeding a predetermined value will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), when the points exceed a predetermined value (200), the bonus points BP in the bonus point display area BPE are displayed blinking to notify that the points have exceeded the predetermined value. In addition, "Get Item" is displayed as a speech bubble from the bonus points BP, and it is notified that an item can be obtained as a benefit based on the points reaching a predetermined value or more. As an item, for example, as a "golden hammer", a character image imitating a golden hammer is displayed together with the text "Golden Hammer as a present".

It is preferable that the item given here be used in the performance during the carryover state. For example, as shown in FIG. 71(b), the Daruma drop performance of the continuous performance (FIG. 59) is changed to a Daruma drop performance using a "golden hammer" and executed. In this case, it is preferable to increase the possibility of continuation in each game of the continuous performance.

In addition, increasing the possibility of continuation in each game of a continuous performance does not mean that the final result of the continuous performance (whether it ends with a successful performance or a failed performance) differs, but rather whether it ends with a failed performance. In some cases, it is intended to change a pattern in which the player fails in the first game to a pattern in which the player fails in the second game more frequently. Furthermore, in a continuous performance that ends with a successful performance, a pattern that results in a successful performance in the third game may be changed to a pattern that results in a successful performance in a smaller second game.

As described above, by utilizing the configuration in which the winning pattern changes before and after the transfer of the carryover state, the winning pattern that appears during the carryover state is awarded more points than the winning pattern that appears before the carryover state. Therefore, if you win a strong cherry or the like during the carryover state, it is possible to compensate for the sense of loss due to the fact that the transition lottery such as attack mode or the additional lottery is not performed, with the above-mentioned points.

In addition, since points are awarded not only during carryover status but also before transition to carryover status, it is possible to associate games before and after transition to carryover status, and games during carryover status can be linked. This will increase interest.

In particular, by increasing the number of points awarded during the carryover state and using the points during the carryover state, the degree of attention to the carryover state can be increased from usual through changes in performance during the carryover state. In this way, by increasing the significance of the period from when the bonus winning flag is set until the bonus winning is achieved, the performance effect of the continuous performance that increases the expectation level for the bonus winning is significantly improved. By adopting such a configuration, the possibility of winning a specific winning combination increases during the carryover state, and the effects of the inventions related to the processing when winning the specific winning combination are also enhanced.

<Third embodiment>
In the first and second embodiments described above, when a strong cherry or a strong watermelon is won, whether or not the restriction on the right reel 32R is released depends on the winning combination. The configuration will be different. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the stop information setting process in this embodiment.

In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the strong cherries 1 and 2 have been won. If strong cherries 1 and 2 have been won, it is determined in step S3002 whether a bonus winning flag has been set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, that is, if there is no carryover state, right reel restriction processing is performed in step S3003. These processes are similar to those in the first embodiment, and by performing the process in step S3003, strong cherries 1 and 2 can be won in the first winning mode and the second winning mode. Therefore, it becomes impossible to win a prize in the third winning mode.

If it is determined in step S3002 that the bonus winning flag is set and the carryover state is in progress, in step S3004 a process is performed to obtain a cancellation table according to the set value from the various table storage areas 105a, and in step S3005 The restriction cancellation lottery process will be carried out at . As shown in FIG. 73(a), the cancellation table is as shown in FIG. It is determined that the probability of not winning is set as follows. Furthermore, settings 4 to 6 are set so that there is a 100% probability of winning the restriction removal lottery. Note that the probability of winning the restriction release lottery may be made different for Strong Cherry 1 and Strong Cherry 2.

In step S3006, it is determined whether or not the restriction release lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S3005. If there is no winning, right reel restriction processing is performed in step S3003. In this case, even in the carryover state, strong cherries 1 and 2 can be won in the first winning mode and the second winning mode, but cannot be won in the third winning mode.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the restriction cancellation lottery has been won, a right reel first restriction cancellation process is executed in step S3007. This process is similar to the first embodiment, and by performing the process in step S3006, strong cherries 1 and 2 can be won in any of the first to third winning modes. In other words, if you perform a stop operation on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming at the "white BAR" symbol, a strong cherry win can be achieved in the third winning mode with all the middle white BARs.

If it is determined in step S3001 that strong cherries 1 and 2 are not won, the process advances to step S3008. In step S3008, it is determined whether or not Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 has been won. If Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 is won, it is determined in step S3009 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If it is determined that the bonus winning flag is not set and the carryover state is not in progress, right reel restriction processing is performed in step S3010. These processes are also the same as those in the first embodiment, and by performing the process in step S3010, it is possible to win Strong Watermelon in the first winning mode and the second winning mode, and in the third, In the fourth winning mode, no prizes can be won.

If it is determined in step S3009 that the bonus winning flag is set and that the carryover state is in progress, the process advances to step S3011. In step S3011, a process is performed to acquire a cancellation table according to the set value from the various table storage areas 105a, and in step S3012, a restriction cancellation lottery process is performed. The restriction cancellation lottery in step S3012 is to determine by lottery whether or not to cancel the first restriction regarding the stop mode of the right reel, and to determine by lottery whether or not to cancel the second restriction.

Specifically, the cancellation table is as shown in FIG. 73(a). For example, if you win Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 during the carryover state, settings 1 to 2 will result in a limit cancellation lottery with a 100% probability. It is stipulated that neither the first restriction nor the second restriction will be lifted. Furthermore, settings 3 to 5 are set such that there is a 50% probability that the player will not win the restriction release lottery, and a 50% probability that the player will win the first restriction release lottery. Setting 6 is set such that there is a 25% probability that you will not win the restriction cancellation lottery, a 25% probability that you will win the first restriction cancellation lottery, and a 50% probability that you will win the second restriction cancellation lottery. . Note that the probability of winning the restriction release lottery may be made different for Strong Watermelon 1, Strong Watermelon 2, and Strong Watermelon 3.

In step S3012, it is determined whether or not the restriction release lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S3012. If the player has not won the restriction release lottery, right reel restriction processing is performed in step S3010. In this case, even in the carryover state, winnings for Strong Watermelons 1 to 3 will be possible in the first winning mode and the second winning mode, but will not be possible in the third and fourth winning modes. .

If it is determined in step S3013 that the player has won the restriction release lottery, it is determined in step S3014 whether or not the player has won the second restriction release lottery. If the second cancellation lottery has not been won, that is, if the first cancellation lottery has been won, the right reel first restriction cancellation process is executed in step S3015. This process is similar to the first embodiment, and by performing the process in step S3015, strong watermelons 1 to 3 can win in the first to third winning modes, and the fourth winning mode In this case, you will not be able to win a prize. In other words, if you perform a stop operation on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, you will be able to win a strong watermelon prize in the third winning mode of cross black BAR singles, and In the fourth winning mode of all-black BAR doubles, a strong watermelon prize will not be established.

If it is determined in step S3014 that the second cancellation lottery has been won, a right reel second restriction cancellation process is executed in step S3016. This process is also similar to the first embodiment, and by performing the process of step S3016, strong watermelons 1 to 3 can win in any of the first to fourth winning modes. In other words, if a stop operation is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, a strong watermelon win can be achieved in the fourth winning mode of double cross black BAR.

After executing any of the processes in step S3003, step S3007, step S3010, step S3015, and step S3016, or if a negative determination is made in step S3008, execute the process in step S3017, and then perform the stop information setting process. finish. The processing in step S3017 is similar to the processing in step S2711.

By doing the above, it is possible to associate the winning pattern when winning a strong cherry or strong watermelon during the carryover state with the setting value, and it is possible to suggest the setting value only by the winning pattern (stop roll). It becomes possible. For example, as shown in FIG. 73(b), if a strong cherry in the carryover state wins in the third winning mode, there is a probability of 50% based on the relationship with the cancellation table in FIG. 73(a). , it turns out that the setting is 4 or higher (settings 4 to 6). In other words, if you aim for the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R when winning a strong cherry during a carryover state, and the winning is achieved in the second winning mode instead of the third winning mode. , it turns out that the settings are 1 to 3 with a 100% probability.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73(b), if the strong watermelon in the carryover state wins in the third winning mode, there is a 100% probability from the relationship with the cancellation table in FIG. 73(a). It turns out that the setting is 3 or higher (settings 3 to 6). Further, when the strong watermelon in the carryover state wins in the fourth winning mode, it is found that the setting is 6 with a 100% probability from the relationship with the cancellation table. In other words, when you win a strong watermelon during a carryover state, if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the winning is achieved in the second winning mode instead of the third winning mode. Even if it is, it is not determined which of settings 1 to 6 it is.

In this way, since the stop control of the right reel 32R is configured to vary depending on the set value, the right reel 32R can be stopped depending on the set value, as in the case of strong cherries 1 and 2 and strong watermelons 1 to 3 in the first and second embodiments. There is no need to set a plurality of results for different stop control of the reels 32R. That is, according to the above embodiment, it is sufficient that either strong cherry 1 or 2 is set for the strong cherry, and that any of strong watermelon 1 to 3 is set for the strong watermelon. This makes it possible to enjoy the effects of changing the stop roll while simplifying the winning combination.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the winning probabilities of strong cherries 1 and 2 and strong watermelons 1 to 3 are varied depending on set values. FIG. 74 shows a lottery table for the normal game state in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, strong cherries are set as strong cherries 1 with IV=13, strong cherries 2 with IV=14, and strong cherries 3 with IV=15. Further, strong watermelon 1 with IV=17, strong watermelon 2 with IV=18, strong watermelon 3 with IV=19, and strong watermelon 4 with IV=20 are set as strong watermelons.

Strong cherries 1 and 2 with IV=13 and 14 have different winning probabilities depending on the set value, and are roles in which a transition lottery such as attack mode can be performed, that is, they are not trigger events for the second advantageous state. On the other hand, strong cherry 3 with IV=15 has the same winning probability regardless of the set value, and is a winning combination that can be a trigger event for the second advantageous state. Specifically, strong cherry 1 with IV=13 will win with a probability of 1/600 in settings 1 to 3, and with a probability of 1/1200 in settings 4 to 6. Strong Cherry 2 with IV=14 will not win in settings 1 to 3, and will win in settings 4 to 6 with a probability of 1/1200. Strong Cherry 3 with IV=15 has a winning probability of 1/600 in all settings. That is, although the probability of winning for strong cherries 1 and 2 differs depending on the setting value, no matter which setting value is used, there is a probability of 1/300 that one of strong cherries 1 to 3 will win.

Strong watermelons 1 to 3 with IV=17 to 19 have different winning probabilities depending on the set value, and are not a trigger event for the second advantageous state. On the other hand, strong watermelon 4 with IV=20 has the same winning probability regardless of the set value, and is a winning combination that can be a trigger event for the second advantageous state. Specifically, for Strong Watermelon 1 with IV=17, settings 1 and 2 have a probability of 1/600 to win, settings 3 to 5 have a probability of 1/1200, and setting 6 has a probability of 1/2400. The probability of winning is 1. For Strong Watermelon 2 with IV=18, settings 1 and 2 do not win, settings 3 to 5 win with a probability of 1/1200, and setting 6 wins with a probability of 1/2400. For Strong Watermelon 3 with IV=19, settings 1 to 5 do not win, but only setting 6 wins, and the probability of winning is 1/1200. Strong Watermelon 4 with IV=20 has a winning probability of 1/600 in all settings. That is, although the probability of winning for Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 varies depending on the set value, there is a probability of 1/300 that any of Strong Watermelon 1 to 4 will be won regardless of the set value.

In detail about Strong Cherries 1 to 3 and Strong Watermelon 1 to 4, as shown in FIG. 1 to 4 are also set so that it is possible to win a winning combination with a common winning mode. Specifically, the winning mode is common in that if you win strong cherries 1 to 3, you can win the 28th small winning combination. Furthermore, the winning mode is common in that if you win Strong Watermelon 1 to 4, you will be able to win the 30th small winning combination. In the figure, the 32nd to 35th minor winnings for strong cherries 1 to 3 are omitted, and the 41st minor winnings for strong watermelons 1 to 4 are omitted.

As already explained, the 42nd minor winning combination to the 44th minor winning combination are control winning combinations for distinguishing winning results. Also, the 45th minor role and the 46th minor role are provided as control roles similarly to the 42nd minor role to the 44th minor role. Then, when the "Youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 45th minor prize is established, and the "Youth" symbol on the left reel 32L. The 45th minor prize is established when the "Youth" symbol, the "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line.

The stop information setting process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 76.

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not the strong cherries 1 to 3 have been won. If any of the strong cherries 1 to 3 has been won, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not a bonus winning flag has been set. If the bonus winning flag is not set and there is no carryover state, right reel restriction processing is executed in step S3103. This process is the same as in the first to third embodiments, and by performing the process in step S3103, the third winning mode of the strong cherry does not stop, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R Even if you aim for the "white BAR" symbol, a strong cherry prize is established in a winning mode in which the middle white bar misses.

If it is determined in step S3102 that the bonus winning flag is set and that the carryover state is in progress, the process advances to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether the strong cherry won this time is strong cherry 2. If it is strong cherry 1 or strong cherry 3 instead of strong cherry 2, the process advances to step S3103 and right reel restriction processing is performed. In other words, even if you win a strong cherry during the carryover state, if it is strong cherry 1 or strong cherry 3, even if you aim for the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, you will not be able to win the middle row. A strong cherry win will be established in a winning mode in which the white BAR is missed.

If it is the strong cherry 2 in step S3104, a right reel first restriction release process is executed in step S3105. This process is similar to the first to third embodiments described above, and by performing the right reel first restriction release process, by aiming at the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the middle row It is possible to achieve a strong cherry prize in a winning mode in which all white BARs are present.

If a negative determination is made in step S3101, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not Strong Watermelon 1 to 4 has been won. If Strong Watermelon 1 to 4 is won, it is determined in step S3107 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set and there is no carryover state, right reel restriction processing is executed in step S3108. This process is the same as in the first to third embodiments, and by performing the process in step S3108, the third and fourth winning modes of Strong Watermelon do not stop, and each reel 32L, 32M , 32R, even if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol, a strong watermelon win is achieved in a winning mode in which the cross black BAR misses.

If it is determined in step S3107 that the bonus winning flag is set and there is a carryover state, the process advances to step S3109. In step S3109, it is determined whether the strong watermelon won this time is strong watermelon 1 or strong watermelon 4. If it is strong watermelon 1 or strong watermelon 4, the process advances to step S3108 and right reel restriction processing is performed. In other words, even if a strong watermelon is won during the carryover state, if it is strong watermelon 1 or strong watermelon 4, the third and fourth winning modes of strong watermelon will not stop, and each A strong watermelon win is achieved in a winning mode in which even if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the cross black BAR misses.

If it is determined in step S3109 that the currently won strong watermelon is strong watermelon 2 or strong watermelon 3, the process advances to step S3110. In step S3110, it is determined whether the watermelon is strong watermelon 3 or not. If it is strong watermelon 2 instead of strong watermelon 3, right reel first restriction release processing is executed in step S3111. This process is similar to the first to third embodiments, and by performing the right reel first restriction release process, the third winning mode of strong watermelon can be stopped, and each reel 32L, 32M, By aiming for the "black BAR" symbol on 32R, a strong watermelon prize is established in a winning mode in which a cross black BAR single is set.

If it is determined in step S3110 that it is strong watermelon 3, a right reel second restriction release process is executed in step S3112. This process is also similar to the first to third embodiments, and by performing the right reel second restriction release process, the fourth winning mode of Strong Watermelon can be stopped, and each reel 32L, 32M, By aiming for the "black BAR" symbol on 32R, a strong watermelon prize is established in a winning mode in which a double cross black bar is arranged.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The winning probability of winning combinations (Strong Cherry 1, 2, Strong Watermelon 1 to 3) whose stop rolls are changed during the carryover state is varied depending on the setting value. Thereby, it is possible to realize a game in which the set value is estimated based on the appearance rate of these winning combinations during the carryover state.

As mentioned above, by changing the probability of winning for Strong Cherry 1, 2 and Strong Watermelon 1-3 depending on the setting value, the said Strong Cherry 1, 2 and Strong Watermelon 1-3 will be entered into the attack mode etc. by lottery or additional Although it is not a trigger for the lottery, winnings as Strong Cherry 3 or Strong Watermelon 4 have the same stopping result as the corresponding Strong Cherry 1, 2 or Strong Watermelon 1 to 3, and the winning probability does not differ depending on the setting value. I set up a role. Therefore, by utilizing the commonality of the stopping result with the winning combination whose winning probability does not differ depending on the setting value, even for the winning combination used for setting value estimation, the lottery to shift to attack mode etc. or the additional lottery This makes me think that this may be an opportunity for this. Therefore, it is possible to compensate for the feeling of loss caused by winning during a carryover state with respect to winning combinations whose winning probabilities differ depending on these setting values through estimation of the setting values.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the second and third winning modes of the strong cherry and the second to fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon are the same as those of the left reel 32L regardless of the symbols stopped on the right reel 32R. It is assumed that a winning is established by the stopped symbols of the middle reel 32M, but in this embodiment, this configuration is changed. FIG. 77 shows symbol combinations that result in winnings of strong cherries 1 and 2 and strong watermelons 1 to 3 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the strong cherries 1 and 2 are won, it becomes possible to achieve the 28th minor prize winning and the 47th minor prize winning. The winning mode for the 28th small winning combination is the first winning mode for strong cherries in each of the above embodiments, which is a triple cherry, and the middle stage, which is the second winning mode for strong cherries in each of the above embodiments. A winning is established in a winning mode in which the white BAR is missed. However, in the winning mode in which the middle white BAR is missed in this embodiment, the stop symbols on the right reel 32R are determined, and specifically, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M are determined. When the "BAR" symbol and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, a strong cherry prize, which is the 28th small prize prize, is established. In other words, in this winning mode, if the "Watermelon" symbol does not stop on the active line of the right reel 32R, even if the "White BAR" symbol stops on the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, the 28th Small role prizes will not be awarded.

In strong cherries 1 and 2, the 47th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the middle row white BAR is aligned, which is the third winning mode for strong cherries in each of the above embodiments. However, in the winning mode in which the middle white BAR is aligned in this embodiment, the stop symbols on the right reel 32R are determined, and specifically, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M are determined. When the "BAR" symbol and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, a strong cherry win, which is the 47th small prize win, is established. In other words, in this winning mode, if the "Red Bell" symbol does not stop on the active line of the right reel 32R, even if the "White BAR" symbol stops on the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, 47 Small winnings will not be awarded.

Although not shown in the drawings, for Strong Cherry 1 and Strong Cherry 2, for example, control combination 1 is set as an overlapping combination in Strong Cherry 2, so that the winning results can be distinguished.

In this embodiment, the symbol arrangement on the right reel 32R is different from the above embodiments. As shown in FIG. 78(a), on the right reel 32R in this embodiment, the "watermelon" symbol is placed 16th. In this case, if you aim for the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when you win the strong cherry 1 or 2 in the 3 bet game, and the second winning mode (28th small prize winning) occurs, A strong cherry prize is established in a winning mode in which the 16th "Watermelon" symbol or the 19th "Watermelon" symbol stops at the lower row and misses the middle row white BAR. On the other hand, if you aim for the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when you win Strong Cherry 1 or 2 in a 3-bet game, and the third winning mode (47th small prize winning) occurs, the 17th A strong cherry prize is established in a winning mode in which the "red bell" symbol or the 20th "red bell" symbol stops at the lower row and the middle row white BAR is aligned (particularly the 17th "red bell" symbol).

That is, in this embodiment, although the symbols of the second winning mode and the third winning mode are set for the right reel 32R as the winning mode when winning a strong cherry, the third winning mode when winning a strong cherry is set. If the right reel 32R is stopped at a timing when the mode can be stopped, it is possible to achieve a strong cherry win in the second winning mode instead of the third winning mode, and the second If the right reel 32R is stopped at a timing when the winning mode can be stopped, it is possible to achieve a strong cherry winning in the third winning mode instead of the second winning mode. The symbol arrangement of the right reel 32R is determined.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 are won, it becomes possible to achieve the 30th small role winning, the 41st small winning winning, the 48th small winning winning, and the 49th small winning winning. The winning mode for the 30th small winning combination is the first winning mode for the strong watermelon in each of the above embodiments, which is the winning mode in which the upper tier watermelon is all together, and the winning mode for the strong watermelon in each of the above embodiments, which is the second winning mode for the strong watermelon. A prize is established in a winning manner in which the black BAR is out. However, in the winning mode in which the cross black BAR is removed in this embodiment, the stopping symbols on the right reel 32R are determined, and specifically, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M are determined. When the "BAR" symbol and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, a strong watermelon prize, which is the 30th minor prize, is established. In other words, in this winning mode, if the "Red Bell" symbol does not stop on the active line of the right reel 32R, even if the "Black BAR" symbol cross tenpai stops on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M. , the 30th small role won't be won.

In Strong Watermelon 1 to 3, the 48th small winning combination is a winning mode in which a cross black BAR single completes, which is the third winning mode of Strong Watermelon in each of the above embodiments. However, in the winning mode in which the cross black BAR single is set in this embodiment, the stop symbols on the right reel 32R are determined, and specifically, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M are determined. When the ``Black BAR'' symbol and the ``White Bell'' symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, a strong watermelon win, which is the 48th small prize win, is established. In other words, in this winning mode, if the "White Bell" symbol does not stop on the active line of the right reel 32R, even if the "Black BAR" symbol cross tenpai stops on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M. , the 48th small role won't be won.

In Strong Watermelon 1 to 3, the 49th small winning combination is a winning mode in which a cross black BAR double is aligned, which is the fourth winning mode of Strong Watermelon in each of the above embodiments. However, in the winning mode where the cross black BAR double aligns in this embodiment, the stop symbols on the right reel 32R are determined, specifically, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M. When the "Black BAR" symbol and the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, a strong watermelon win, which is the 49th small prize win, is established. In other words, in this winning mode, if the "Black BAR" symbol does not stop on the active line of the right reel 32R, even if the "Black BAR" symbol cross tenpai stops on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M. , the 49th small role won't be won.

Although not shown in the figure, in Strong Watermelon 1, Strong Watermelon 2, and Strong Watermelon 3, for example, in Strong Watermelon 2, the control combination 2 is set as an overlapping combination, and in Strong Watermelon 3, the control combination 3 is set as an overlapping combination. It is set as a duplicate role, making it possible to distinguish the winning results.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), on the right reel 32R in this embodiment, "red bell" symbols are placed at the 6th and 10th positions, and a "white bell" symbol is placed at the 5th position. In this case, if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when winning Strong Watermelon 1 to 4 in the 3 bet game, and the second winning mode (30th small prize winning) occurs, A strong watermelon prize is established in a winning mode in which the 6th "red bell" symbol or the 10th "red bell" symbol stops at the lower stage and the cross black BAR is missed. On the other hand, if you aim for the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when winning Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 in a 3-bet game, and the 3rd winning mode (48th small prize winning) occurs, the 5th A strong watermelon prize is established in a winning mode in which the "white bell" symbol stops at the bottom and the cross black BAR is aligned.

In addition, in a 3-bet game, if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when winning Strong Watermelon 1 to 4, and the 4th winning mode (49th small prize winning) occurs, 7 A strong watermelon prize is established in a winning mode in which the th "black BAR" symbol or the 9th "black BAR" symbol stops at the lower row and the cross black BAR double aligns.

That is, in this embodiment, although the symbols of the second winning mode, the third winning mode, and the fourth winning mode are set for the right reel 32R as winning modes when winning a strong watermelon, when winning a strong watermelon, If the right reel 32R is stopped at a timing when the second winning mode can be stopped, a strong watermelon win will be made in the second winning mode instead of the third or fourth winning mode. Even if the right reel 32R is stopped at a timing when the third winning mode or the fourth winning mode can be stopped, a strong watermelon win can be achieved in the second winning mode. The symbol arrangement of the right reel 32R is determined so that it can be realized. In addition, if the right reel 32R is stopped at a timing when the third winning mode can be stopped, a strong watermelon will be won in the third winning mode instead of the second or fourth winning mode. As mentioned above, even if the right reel 32R is stopped at a timing when the third winning mode can be stopped, a strong watermelon win can be achieved in the second winning mode. The symbol arrangement of the right reel 32R is determined so that it is possible to achieve the following. If the right reel 32R is stopped so that the fourth winning mode can be stopped, the strong watermelon will be played in the fourth winning mode instead of the second or third winning mode. It is possible to win a prize, and as described above, even if the right reel 32R is stopped at a timing when the fourth winning mode can be stopped, a strong watermelon is generated in the second winning mode. The symbol arrangement of the right reel 32R is determined so that winnings can be achieved.

The stop information setting process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 79.

In step S3201, it is determined whether or not strong cherries 1 and 2 have been won. If strong cherries 1 and 2 have been won, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not a bonus winning flag has been set. If the bonus winning flag is not set and the state is not carried over, in step S3203, the winning mode of the current strong cherry is the 28th minor prize of the 28th minor prize and the 47th minor prize. Processing is performed to prioritize and make it hold true.

In this case, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to make the 28th small role win but not the 47th small role win, the 28th small role win will be made. Stop drive control is performed. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve both the 28th minor role winning and the 47th minor role winning, the 28th minor role winning will be achieved instead of the 47th minor role winning. Stop drive control is performed so as to If the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 47th minor role winning but cannot establish the 28th minor role winning, the stop operation is performed so that the 47th minor role winning can be established. Drive control is performed. However, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the 47th minor prize winning can be achieved, the symbols are designed so that the 28th minor prize winning can also be achieved. The sequence is defined. Therefore, by performing the process of step S3203, the 28th minor prize winning is established among the 28th minor prize winning and the 47th minor prize winning, resulting in a strong cherry winning. In other words, among the first to third winning modes of strong cherry, a strong cherry winning mode is achieved in the first and second winning mode, and a strong cherry winning mode is not achieved in the third winning mode.

If it is determined in step S3202 that the bonus winning flag is set and there is a carryover state, then it is determined in step S3204 whether or not a strong cherry 1 is won. If it is a strong cherry 1 win, the process proceeds to step S3203, and a process is executed to give priority to the 28th small winning combination. That is, in Strong Cherry 1, even in the carryover state, a Strong Cherry winning cannot be established in the third winning mode.

If it is determined in step S3204 that Strong Cherry 2 is won instead of Strong Cherry 1, then in Step S3205, the 47th out of the 28th Small Win and the 47th Small Win is selected as the winning mode of the current Strong Cherry. Processing is performed to give priority to winning small winning combinations.

In this case, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 47th minor role winning but cannot establish the 28th minor role winning, the 47th minor role winning will be established. Stop drive control is performed. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve both the 28th minor role winning and the 47th minor role winning, the 47th minor role winning will be achieved instead of the 28th minor role winning. Stop drive control is performed so as to If the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 28th minor role win but not the 47th minor role win, the stop operation is performed so that the 28th minor role win is established. Drive control is performed. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 28th minor prize winning can be achieved, the symbol arrangement is arranged so that the 47th minor prize winning can also be achieved. It is determined. Therefore, by performing the process of step S3205, the 47th minor prize winning is established among the 28th minor prize winning and the 47th minor prize winning, and it becomes a strong cherry prize winning. In other words, among the first to third winning modes of strong cherry, a strong cherry winning mode is achieved in the first and third winning modes, and a strong cherry winning mode is not achieved in the second winning mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3206 whether or not Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 has been won. If Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 is won, it is determined in step S3207 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set and there is no carryover status, in step S3208, the winning modes of this strong watermelon are 30th minor prize winning, 48th minor prize winning, and 49th minor prize winning. Among them, processing is performed to give priority to the 30th small winning combination.

In this case, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 30th minor role win but not the 48th minor role win, the 30th minor role win will be established. Stop drive control is performed. If the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 30th minor role winning but not the 49th minor role winning, the stop drive control is performed so as to establish the 30th minor role winning. will be held. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve any of the 30th small role winning, the 48th small role winning, and the 49th small role winning, the 48th small role winning or the 49th small role winning, Stop drive control is performed so that the 30th small winning combination is achieved instead of the small winning combination winning. If the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 48th minor role winning but cannot establish the 30th minor role winning, the stop operation is performed so that the 48th minor role winning can be established. Drive control is performed. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 49th minor role winning but cannot establish the 30th minor role winning, the stop operation will be stopped so that the 49th minor role winning will be established. Drive control is performed. However, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 48th minor prize winning can be achieved, the symbols are designed so that it is possible to also achieve the 30th minor prize winning. The sequence is defined. Further, the symbol arrangement is determined so that if the stop operation is performed at a timing that allows the 49th minor winning combination to be achieved, the 30th minor winning combination can also be achieved. Therefore, by performing the process of step S3208 above, the 30th minor prize winning is established among the 30th minor prize winning, the 48th minor prize winning, and the 49th minor prize winning, and it becomes a strong watermelon prize. . In other words, out of the first to fourth winning modes of strong watermelon, a strong watermelon winning mode is established in the first and second winning mode, and a strong watermelon winning mode is not established in the third and fourth winning mode. Become.

If it is determined in step S3207 that there is a carryover state, it is determined in step S3209 whether or not one strong watermelon has been won. If the strong watermelon 1 is won, the process proceeds to step S3208, and a process is executed to give priority to the 30th small winning combination. That is, in Strong Watermelon 1, even in the carryover state, the Strong Watermelon winning cannot be established in the third and fourth winning modes.

If it is determined in step S3209 that it is not strong watermelon 1, it is determined in step S3210 whether or not it is strong watermelon 3. If it is determined that it is strong watermelon 2 instead of strong watermelon 3, in step S3211, the winning mode of this strong watermelon is one of the 30th small prize winning, the 48th small winning prize winning, and the 49th small winning winning prize. , a process is performed in which the 48th minor winning combination is prioritized and established, then the 30th minor winning combination is prioritized and established, and then the 49th minor winning combination is established.

In this case, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 48th small role win but cannot achieve the 30th small role win, the 48th small role win will be established. Stop drive control is performed. If the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 48th small role winning but cannot achieve the 49th small role winning, stop drive control is performed so as to establish the 48th small role winning. will be held. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve any of the 30th minor role winning, the 48th minor role winning, and the 49th minor role winning, the 30th minor role winning or the 49th minor role winning will occur. Stop drive control is performed so as to establish the 48th small role win instead of the small role win. If the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 30th minor role win but not the 48th minor role win, the stop operation is performed so that the 30th minor role win is established. Drive control is performed. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 30th minor role winning but not the 49th minor role winning, the stop operation will be stopped so that the 30th minor role winning will be established. Drive control is performed. Furthermore, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to win the 30th small role but cannot achieve the 48th or 49th small role, then the 30th small role is won. Stop drive control is performed so that the following is established. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 48th minor winning combination can be achieved, the symbol arrangement is arranged so that the 30th minor winning combination can also be achieved. It is determined. Therefore, by performing the process of step S3211, the 48th small role win is established among the 30th small role win, the 48th small role win, and the 49th small role win, resulting in a strong watermelon win, and the 48th small role win. If the winning combination cannot be established, the 30th minor winning prize will be established and it will become a strong watermelon winning prize. In other words, even if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 49th minor role is won, the 48th minor role or 30th minor role will be won instead of the 49th minor role, resulting in a strong watermelon win. . In other words, out of the first to fourth winning modes of strong watermelon, a strong watermelon winning mode is achieved in the first to third winning modes, and a strong watermelon winning mode is not established in the fourth winning mode.

If it is determined in step S3210 that the strong watermelon 3 has been won, in step S3212, the winning mode of the current strong watermelon is selected among the 30th small prize winning, the 48th small prize winning, and the 49th small winning winning. , the 49th minor winning combination is prioritized and established, then the 48th minor winning combination is prioritized and established, and then the 30th minor winning combination is established.

In this case, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to make the 49th small role win but cannot make the 48th small role win, the 49th small role win will be made. Stop drive control is performed. If the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 49th small role winning but cannot achieve the 30th small role winning, stop drive control is performed so as to establish the 49th small role winning. will be held. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve any of the 30th minor role winning, the 48th minor role winning, and the 49th minor role winning, the 30th minor role winning or the 48th minor role winning will occur. Stop drive control is performed so as to establish the 49th small winning combination instead of the small winning winning. If the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 48th minor role winning but cannot establish the 49th minor role winning, the stop operation is performed so that the 48th minor role winning can be established. Drive control is performed. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to achieve the 48th minor role winning but cannot establish the 30th minor role winning, the stop operation will be stopped so that the 48th minor role winning will be established. Drive control is performed. Furthermore, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is possible to win the 48th small role but cannot achieve the 30th or 49th small role, then the 48th small role is won. Stop drive control is performed so that the following is established. As described above, in the present embodiment, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the 49th small role winning can be achieved, it is possible to also achieve the 30th small role winning, and the 48th small role winning can also be achieved. The symbol arrangement is determined in such a way that if the stop operation is performed at a timing that allows a winning combination to be achieved, it is also possible to achieve a 30th minor winning combination. Therefore, by performing the process of step S3212, the 49th small role win is established among the 30th small role win, the 48th small role win, and the 49th small role win, resulting in a strong watermelon win, and the 49th small role win. If the 48th minor role win cannot be established, the 48th minor role win will be established and it will be a strong watermelon win, and if the 48th minor role win cannot be established, the 30th minor role win will be established and it will be a strong watermelon win. It will become. In other words, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 49th small role win will be won, the 49th small role win will be established, and if the stop operation is performed at a timing other than this timing, another small role win will be established. . In other words, out of the first to fourth winning modes of strong watermelon, any of the first to fourth winning modes will result in a strong watermelon winning.

By doing as described above, even if the winning symbol combination is also a game result set for the right reel 32R, the winning mode can be changed depending on the presence or absence of the bonus winning flag. In other words, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, it is possible to avoid stopping the third winning mode of Strong Cherry or the third and fourth winning modes of Strong Watermelon depending on the timing of the stop operation. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the rarity of the middle white BAR matching and the cross black BAR single matching/double matching stopping, and to ensure the occurrence of stopping in situations where the transition lottery to attack mode etc. or the additional lottery is not performed. It becomes possible. Therefore, the significance of this benefit as a substitute for not having these transition drawings and additional drawings is maintained.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, there is a carryover state in which the first BB winning flag is set (hereinafter referred to as "first carryover state") and a carryover state in which the second BB winning flag is set (hereinafter referred to as "second carryover state"). ), the prize winning modes for Strong Cherry 1 and 2 and Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 are different. FIG. 80 shows an overview of changes in the prize winning modes of strong cherries 1 and 2 and strong watermelons 1 to 3 in this embodiment.

In the case of strong cherry 1 in this embodiment, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the first winning mode of triple cherry and the second winning mode of middle white BAR are stopped. Although it is possible, it is not possible to stop the third prize winning mode, which is the middle row of white BARs. On the other hand, in the first carryover state where the 1st BB winning flag is set, all of the first to third winning modes can be stopped, and in the second carryover state where the 2nd BB winning flag is set, Although the first winning mode and the second winning mode can be stopped, the third winning mode cannot be stopped.

Strong Cherry 2 in this embodiment is that in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the first winning mode and the second winning mode can be stopped, but the third winning mode The aspect is considered unstoppable. On the other hand, in the first carryover state or the second carryover state, any of the first to third winning modes can be stopped.

In other words, when any of the bonus winning flags is set, if Strong Cherry 1 or Strong Cherry 2 is won, and the middle row of white BARs stop matching, it is the case that Strong Cherry 1 is won and the 1st BB is won, or This means that 2 strong cherries were won. In other words, if the alignment of the middle white BARs does not stop and the middle white BARs stop coming off, it is confirmed that the strong cherry 1 and the second BB are won.

The winning probability of Strong Cherry 1 is set so that it is harder to win with settings 4 to 6 than with settings 1 to 3, so when any bonus is carried over, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will have a "white bar". ” symbol, but if you miss the middle white BAR and win a strong cherry, there is a high possibility that it will be set 1 to 3. On the other hand, in the second carryover state where the 2nd BB winning flag is set, it is Strong Cherry 2 that stops matching the middle white BARs, and Strong Cherry 2 cannot be won with settings 1 to 3. In the carryover state of the bonus, if a strong cherry win is achieved by aiming at the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the middle white BAR is aligned, and then a 2nd BB win is achieved, setting 4 It is determined that the above is the case.

In addition, in the case of the strong watermelon 1 in this embodiment, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the first winning mode, which is the upper row watermelon, and the second winning mode, which is the cross black BAR, are not set. Although it is possible to stop, the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode, which are the cross black BAR single set and the cross black BAR double set, cannot be stopped. In addition, regarding Strong Watermelon 1, a prize is established even if the watermelon is missed, regardless of whether it is carried over or not. The same applies to strong watermelon 2 and 3 as well. On the other hand, in Strong Watermelon 1, the winning mode does not change even if it is in the first carryover state or the second carryover state, the first winning mode and the second winning mode can be stopped, and the third winning mode is The winning mode and the fourth winning mode cannot be stopped.

In Strong Watermelon 2, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the first winning mode and the second winning mode can be stopped, but the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode can be stopped. The winning mode cannot be stopped. In the first carryover state, the winning mode does not change, the first winning mode and the second winning mode can be stopped, and the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode cannot be stopped. On the other hand, in the second carryover state, any of the first to fourth winning modes can be stopped.

In Strong Watermelon 3, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the first winning mode and the second winning mode can be stopped, but the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode can be stopped. The winning mode cannot be stopped. In the first carryover state, all of the first to fourth winning modes can be stopped, and in the second carryover state, the first to third winning modes can be stopped, and the fourth The winning mode cannot be stopped.

That is, when the cross black BAR double arrangement stops, it is confirmed that Strong Watermelon 2 is won and the second BB is won, or Strong Watermelon 3 is won and the first BB is won.

In the first carryover state where the 1st BB winning flag is set, the cross black BAR double arrangement stops at Strong Watermelon 3, and Strong Watermelon 3 wins by setting 6, so either bonus In the carryover state, if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a strong watermelon win is achieved with a double cross black BAR, and then a 1st BB win is achieved, the setting is 6. Determine. In addition, in the second carryover state where the 2nd BB winning flag is set, it is Strong Watermelon 2 that stops the cross black BAR double alignment, and Strong Watermelon 2 does not win with settings 1 and 2, but with setting 3. The winning probability is set so that it is easier to win with ~5 than setting 6, so when any bonus is carried over, aim for the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, cross black If a strong watermelon win is achieved by matching BAR doubles, and then a second BB win is achieved, it is confirmed that the setting is 3 or higher, and the possibility of setting 3 to 5 is higher than the possibility of setting 6. Become.

In the bonus winning notification in this embodiment, the type of winning bonus (first BB or second BB) is notified. Therefore, after the notification of whether the first BB or the second BB has been won in the bonus winning notification is made, the specific winning combination in the carryover state will occur. If a specific winning combination is won during the carryover state, as in the first embodiment, the notification that the player has won the strong cherry or the player who has won the strong watermelon is sent to the white bar. This is performed by a push instruction notification effect, a black bar push instruction notification effect, or the like. By doing this, for example, if a player is notified that he has won a strong cherry in a situation where he has been notified that he has won the second BB, he will be able to see that the middle white BAR will be the same ( Perform the stop operation while hoping that the setting is 4 or higher. In addition, if it is announced that a strong watermelon has been won in a situation where it is announced that the 1st BB has been won, the cross black BAR double will be aligned (strong watermelon 3), that is, the setting I perform the stop operation while hoping that it is 6. Therefore, by performing the stop operation while narrowing down the setting values before the stop rather than after the stop, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the degree of attention to the stop result.

In addition, it is now possible to associate not only the winning mode that will be stopped, but also the type of bonus that has been won, with the set value suggestion, and not only the winning pattern that will be stopped during the carryover state, but also the type of bonus that will be transferred after that. You can make them come to you.

As described above, in the configuration in which the winning modes of specific combinations in the carryover state of the first BB and the second BB are made different, the winning probabilities of the first BB and the second BB may be made different. In this case, as mentioned above, when you win Strong Cherry 2 and the 2nd BB, it is confirmed that the middle row white BAR is set to 4 or higher, or when you win Strong Watermelon 3 and the 1st BB, it is confirmed that the setting is 6 with the cross black BAR double set. It is preferable to set each BB winning probability in relation to the frequency of appearance of set value suggestions such as fixed value and ease of narrowing down. For example, from the perspective of ease of narrowing down, it is easier to narrow down the setting value by suggesting a setting of 6 than by suggesting a setting of 4 or higher, so it is easier to narrow down the setting value by suggesting a setting of 6 or higher. It may be a simple configuration.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the manner in which setting values are suggested is different from the first to fifth embodiments described above. FIG. 81 shows an overview of the symbol combinations and winning probabilities of the strong watermelons 1 to 3 in this embodiment. In addition, in this embodiment, the winning mode for strong cherries does not change before and after the transfer to the carryover state.

In this embodiment, if Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 are won, it becomes possible to achieve the 30th minor prize winning and the 48th minor prize winning. The 30th small winning combination is the same as in each of the above embodiments, and the winning modes are set so that the strong watermelon winning mode can be established in the first to fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon. Among these, for the 30th small prize winning of Strong Watermelon 1 and Strong Watermelon 2, the winning pattern does not change before and after the transition to the carryover state (the restriction on the right reel 32R is not released), and even if it is won during the carryover state. It is possible to make a strong watermelon prize in the first winning mode or the second winning mode, but it is not possible to make a strong watermelon winning in the third and fourth winning modes. In addition, for the 30th small prize winning of Strong Watermelon 3, the winning mode changes before and after the transition to the carryover state, and before the shift to the carryover state, the strong watermelon winning is achieved in both the first and second winning modes. However, in the third and fourth winning modes, a strong watermelon winning cannot be achieved. Then, the 30th minor prize winning of Strong Watermelon 3 can be achieved in the first to fourth winning modes during the carryover state.

The 50th small prize winning is set to the first winning mode of the strong watermelon (all watermelons in the upper tier), the winning mode in which the middle tier white BAR is off, and the winning mode in which the middle tier white BAR is aligned. These winning modes in which the middle white BAR is missed correspond to the second winning mode for strong cherries shown in each of the above embodiments. Hereinafter, as a winning mode of the strong watermelon, the middle row white BAR loss will also be referred to as the fifth winning mode of the strong watermelon. Moreover, the winning mode in which the middle row white BAR is aligned corresponds to the third winning mode for strong cherries shown in each of the above embodiments. Hereinafter, the middle row white BAR matching as the winning mode of Strong Watermelon will also be referred to as the sixth winning mode of Strong Watermelon. In addition, in this embodiment as well, when the middle row white BAR is off and the middle row white BAR is aligned in the 50th small prize winning, the prize is won by the stopping symbols of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, as in the first to fourth embodiments. is established, and the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination.

Among these, for the 50th small winning of Strong Watermelon 1, the winning pattern does not change before and after the transition to the carryover state (right reel 32R restriction is not released), and even if it is won during the carryover state, the first prize is still won. It becomes possible to establish a strong watermelon prize in the winning mode or the fifth winning mode, and it is not possible to establish a strong watermelon prize in the sixth winning mode. In addition, for the 50th small prize winning of Strong Watermelon 2 and Strong Watermelon 3, the winning mode changes before and after the transition to the carryover state, and before the shift to the carryover state, both the first and fifth winning modes are strong. While it is possible to win a watermelon, it is not possible to win a strong watermelon in the sixth winning mode. The 50th small prize of Strong Watermelon 2 and Strong Watermelon 3 can be achieved in the first, fifth, and sixth winning modes during the carryover state.

As for the winning probability of each strong watermelon, strong watermelon 1 has a probability of 1 in 600 to win in settings 1 to 3, settings 4 and 5 have a probability of 1 in 1200, and setting 6 has a probability of 1 in 2400. The probability of winning is 1. Strong Watermelon 2 will not win in settings 1 to 3, and will win in settings 4 to 6 with a probability of 1/1200. For Strong Watermelon 3, settings 1 to 5 will not win, and setting 6 will win with a probability of 1/2400. In other words, although the probability of winning for Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 differs depending on the setting value, they have a common point that any of Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 will win with a probability of 1/600.

Although not shown in the drawings, control combinations for distinguishing the winning results of Strong Watermelons 1 to 3 are also set in this embodiment.

In this case, before the transfer to the carryover state, regardless of whether it is strong watermelon 1 to 3, the first winning mode of strong watermelon (all watermelons in the upper row), the second winning mode (cross black BAR missing), the second winning mode (cross black BAR missing), Since the winning is achieved in the winning mode of No. 5 (the white BAR in the middle is off), it is not possible to determine which of the strong watermelons 1 to 3, which have different winning probabilities, has been won. On the other hand, after the transfer to the carryover state, the winning mode for Strong Watermelon 1 does not change, but the winning mode for Strong Watermelon 2 and Strong Watermelon 3 changes. In other words, in case of Strong Watermelon 2, it is possible to win with the 6th winning mode (all white BARs in the middle row) in addition to the 1st winning mode, the 2nd winning mode, and the 5th winning mode. becomes. In addition, if it is Strong Watermelon 3, in addition to the first winning mode, the second winning mode, and the fifth winning mode, the third winning mode (cross black BAR single set) and the fourth winning mode ( It is possible to win a prize using the cross black BAR double set) and the sixth winning mode (middle row white BAR set).

As mentioned above, Strong Watermelon 2 will not win with settings 1 to 3. Therefore, when a strong watermelon win is established in the sixth winning mode (all white BARs in the middle row) in the carryover state, it is confirmed that the setting is 4 or higher. Also, Strong Watermelon 3 cannot be won with settings 1 to 5. Therefore, in the carryover state, when a strong watermelon win is established in the third winning mode or the fourth winning mode, setting 6 is confirmed.

The sixth winning mode of Strong Watermelon can be stopped when Strong Watermelon 2 or Strong Watermelon 3 is won in the carryover state. On the other hand, the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode of Strong Watermelon may be stopped when Strong Watermelon 3 is won in the carryover state. Therefore, for example, in the case of setting 6, a strong watermelon prize is established in the 6th winning mode with a probability of 1/2 of winning strong watermelons 1 to 3 (probability of 1/1200 for each game). It is now possible to win a strong watermelon prize in the third and fourth winning modes with a probability of 1/4 of winning strong watermelon 1 to 3 (probability of 1/2400 in each game). Become. In other words, if setting 6 is set as the setting value, setting value suggestions of setting 4 or higher (sixth winning mode) appear more frequently than setting value suggestions of setting 6 (third and fourth winning modes). It's getting easier.

The third and fourth winning modes, which are cross black BAR single/double alignment, and the sixth winning mode, which is middle white BAR alignment, are designed so that the pattern arrangement is such that it is possible for them to miss each other. ing. In other words, the setting value suggestion for setting 4 or above and the setting value suggestion for setting 6 do not appear at the same time, and are in a relationship such that if one is attempted to appear, the other cannot appear. In this way, it becomes possible to play a game in which the player selects in advance setting value suggestions with different degrees of narrowing down the setting values, and then makes such setting value suggestions appear at the stop roll. The interest of the game is greatly improved by narrowing down the information.

<Eighth embodiment>
In this embodiment, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, even if a specific winning combination that triggers a transition lottery such as attack mode or an additional lottery is won, other small prize winnings will be established. The prize winning method is determined. FIG. 82 shows an overview of winning modes of weak cherry, strong cherry, weak watermelon, and strong watermelon as specific winning combinations that trigger transition drawings such as attack mode and additional drawings in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, 1st CB to 4th CB are set as state transition winnings that transition to the CB state. The 1st CB is a winning combination in which winning is determined only by the symbols stopped on the left reel 32L, and a winning pattern corresponding to the 27th small winning combination in each of the above embodiments and a winning pattern that becomes a substitute symbol in case of a missed winning combination are set. ing. That is, the first CB winning is established when any of the "cherry" symbol, "first replay" symbol, or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the active line.

The 2nd CB is set with a winning mode corresponding to the 28th small combination in each of the above embodiments and a winning mode that becomes a substitute symbol in case of a missed winning. That is, the "cherry" symbol, "first replay" symbol, or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol, "white bell" symbol, or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel symbol. The 2nd CB winning is established when the ``Cherry'' symbol of 32R, the ``1st Replay'' symbol, or the ``2nd Replay'' symbol stops on the activated line.

The 3rd CB is set with winning modes corresponding to the 29th small win and 41st small win in each of the above embodiments, and a winning mode that becomes a substitute symbol in case of a missed win. That is, the "Watermelon" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R have stopped on the active line. , the "Watermelon" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Cherry" symbol or "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. In this case, the 3rd CB prize is established.

The 4th CB is set with winning modes corresponding to the 30th small win and 41st small win in each of the above embodiments, and a winning mode that becomes a substitute symbol in case of a missed win. In other words, the "watermelon" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the active line. When it stops, the "Watermelon" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Cherry" symbol or "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the active line. The 4th CB prize is established when the game stops at .

When these 1st CB to 4th CB wins are established, the game shifts to a CB state where the upper limit of the number of payouts is 5 coins. In this embodiment, the number of payouts for each small role in the 2-bet game is 5 medals, and in the CB state based on winnings from the 1st CB to the 4th CB, 5 medals can be obtained in any CB state. It becomes possible.

Weak cherry, strong cherry, weak watermelon, and strong watermelon in this embodiment are set as combinations of any of the 1st CB to 4th CB and the 2nd to 26th minor roles. The 2nd minor win to the 26th minor win are the same as in each of the above embodiments, and in each case, a winning mode is set in which the upper row bells are aligned, and three coins are paid out. More specifically, weak cherry is a combination of the 1st CB and 2nd to 26th minor roles, strong cherry is a combination of 2nd CB and 2nd to 26th minor roles, and weak watermelon is a combination of the 2nd CB and 2nd to 26th minor roles. It is an overlapping role of the 3CB and the 2nd minor role to the 26th minor role, and Strong Watermelon is an overlapping role of the 4th CB and the 2nd minor role to the 26th minor role.

When a 1st CB to 4th CB winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, a payout does not occur in the game at which the winning occurs, but the state shifts to a CB state in which 5 coins are paid out in a 2-bet game. In other words, if the 1st CB to 4th CB wins are established, it becomes possible to receive a payout of 3 coins including the CB state (with a deduction of 0 coins). Furthermore, if the 2nd to 26th minor winning combinations are achieved in a 3-bet game, it becomes possible to receive a payout of 3 coins (with a deduction of 0 coins). In other words, the benefits obtained by the player are set to be the same when the 1st CB to 4th CB wins are achieved and when the 2nd minor role to 26th minor role wins are established.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a weak cherry, a strong cherry, a weak watermelon, or a strong watermelon is won, a lottery to shift to attack mode or the like or an additional lottery is performed. The winning probabilities are arbitrary, but for example, the winning probabilities of the first embodiment can be used. In a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, that is, in a carryover state, these transition drawings and additional drawings are not performed (the first specific winning combination processing to the third specific winning processing are not executed) as described above. That's right.

As already explained, the first advantageous state is a bonus state that is advantageous to the player by changing the probability of winning or losing a small winning lottery (lottery table). It is set so that it does not occur twice. In other words, in a situation where the transition to the bonus state based on winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is confirmed and the bonus winning flag is set, it is set so that the 1st BB, the 2nd BB, or the CB will not be won. For example, in the carryover state, if a bonus combination of IV=35 to 48 in FIG. 17 is won, the small winning flag such as Strong Cherry or Strong Watermelon will be set, but the corresponding bonus winning flag will not be set. .

Also, if the bonus winning flag is set for the combinations that overlap with each CB (weak cherry, strong cherry, weak watermelon, strong watermelon) that trigger the transition lottery and additional lottery such as attack mode in this embodiment. is set so that the event of each CB being won twice does not occur. In other words, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, if a winning combination with each of these CBs is won, each CB winning flag will not be set, but the 2nd to 26th minor winning flags will be set. Ru. As a result, regarding the combinations of combinations with these CBs, the combination of winning combinations that can be won will differ depending on whether or not there is a carryover state.

Weak Cherry, which is a combination of the 1st CB and the 2nd minor role to the 26th minor role, can win any of the 1st CB and the 2nd minor role to the 26th minor role before the transition to the carryover state. be. However, in the priority setting process of step S315 in this embodiment, settings are made so that CB winnings are established with priority over small winning winnings. Therefore, if the weak cherry wins before the carryover state, the first CB prize will be established. On the other hand, after the transition to the carryover state, if the weak cherry is won, the 1st CB winning flag among the 1st CB and the 2nd to 26th minor roles will not be set, and the 26 Small winning winning flag is set. As a result, if the weak cherry is won during the carryover state, the 2nd to 26th minor winning combinations will be achieved.

Similarly, the strong cherry, which is a combination of the 2nd CB and the 2nd minor role to the 26th minor role, will win for both the 2nd CB and the 2nd minor role to the 26th minor role before the transition to the carryover state. is possible. However, in the priority setting process of step S315 in this embodiment, settings are made so that CB winnings are established with priority over small winning winnings. Therefore, if the strong cherry wins before the carryover state, the second CB prize will be established. On the other hand, after the transition to the carryover state, if the strong cherry is won, the 2nd CB winning flag among the 2nd CB and the 2nd minor role to the 26th minor role is not set, and the 2nd CB winning flag of the 2nd minor role to the 26th minor role is not set 26 Small winning winning flag is set. As a result, if the strong cherry is won during the carryover state, the 2nd to 26th minor winning combinations will be achieved.

The same goes for the weak watermelon, which is a combination of the 3rd CB and the 2nd minor role to the 26th minor role, and the strong watermelon, which is the duplicate role of the 4th CB and the 2nd minor role to the 26th minor role, and the carryover state transition. In the previous example, when a weak watermelon is won, a 3rd CB prize is established, and when a strong watermelon is won, a 4th CB prize is established. During the carryover state, when a weak watermelon is won and when a strong watermelon is won, the 2nd to 26th small winning combinations are established.

As mentioned above, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, it is possible to use the event that a new bonus winning flag (CB winning flag) is not set to change the winning winning combination during the carryover state. It becomes possible.

Specifically, although it is possible to win a combination of combinations with each CB (specific combination) in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, if a combination of combinations with each CB is won in that situation, the CB winning flag is set. Do not set, but set the 2nd to 26th minor winning flags. Then, in this situation, even if there is a double winning combination, no CB winning will occur, and only the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning winning combination will occur.

In other words, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, if you win a duplicate combination that triggers a lottery to move to attack mode etc. or an additional lottery, the CB winning flag and the 2nd to 26th minor prizes will be won. flag is set so that any winning can be achieved, but if the bonus winning flag is set and a duplicate winning is achieved, only the 2nd to 26th minor winning flags are set. is set, so that only winnings in the 2nd to 26th minor roles can be achieved. Therefore, depending on the presence or absence of the bonus winning flag, it is possible to vary the winning result when winning a duplicate combination.

In particular, when a duplicate winning combination is won in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, the CB winning is given priority among the CB winning and the 2nd to 26th minor winnings. Therefore, if a duplicate combination is won in such a situation, a CB win will be established. By doing this, if the bonus winning flag is not set, a CB win can be established, and if the bonus winning flag is set, the 2nd minor role to the 26th minor role winning can be established. It is possible to achieve separate winning results.

The winning mode for each CB winning is set to correspond to the winning mode for winning weak cherry, strong cherry, weak watermelon, and strong watermelon in each of the above embodiments. In other words, when the 1st CB win is established, the same stopping result as in the case where the weak cherry win in each of the above embodiments is established, and when the 2nd CB win is established, the strong cherry win in each of the above embodiments is the same. If the same stopping result is achieved and the 3rd CB winning is achieved, the same stopping result is obtained as in the case where the weak watermelon winning mentioned in each of the above embodiments is achieved, and the 4th CB winning is achieved, The same stopping result as in the case where the strong watermelon winning mentioned in each of the above embodiments is established. These winning modes are the same as winning combinations with bonuses (weak cherry duplicates 1, 2, etc.), and through these winning modes, it is possible to arouse expectations for bonuses, attack modes, etc. ing.

Then, when a specific winning combination that is an overlapping combination with each of these CBs is won in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, the CB winning is established in the above-mentioned winning manner such as cherry. On the other hand, if the bonus winning flag is set and the specific winning combination is won, the 2nd to 26th small winning combinations will be won as described above, and the winning pattern will be all the upper bells, which is normal. This is a stop result that sometimes occurs frequently. By doing this, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, the bonus winning flag is set while creating a sense of expectation for the lottery to shift to attack mode depending on the winning pattern of the specific winning combination. In certain situations, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that a specific winning combination has been won by aligning the upper row of bells. By doing this, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, it gives a sense of loss that the transition lottery will not be held even though you have won the trigger lottery for transition to attack mode etc. It becomes possible to make it difficult.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, a carryover state is applied to a specific role that is a trigger for a transition lottery to an attack mode, etc. or an additional lottery, or a role that has a commonality of a stop roll with a specific role that is a trigger for an attack mode etc. In this case, when a player wins during the winning period, the winning pattern changes compared to before the transition to the carryover state. However, the winning pattern is not limited to these winning hands, and may be other winning hands. , it is also possible to have a configuration that includes other roles. For example, as other winning combinations, the winning pattern may be different depending on before and after the transition to the carryover state for the pushing order bell as a pushing order winning combination, or the pushing order replay, or the winning pattern of other payout small winning combinations such as a common bell may be changed. It is also possible to have a different configuration.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the situation in which the execution of the process related to the transition lottery to the attack mode etc. and the additional lottery (process related to the instruction function and the process related to the transition lottery to the advantageous area) is restricted is that the first BB and the second BB Although the carryover state has been described as an example, the present invention is not limited to the carryover state, as long as the processing related to the instruction function and the execution of the lottery for moving to an advantageous section are restricted. For example, a situation in which execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted may be set as a bonus state, or may be set as a bonus winning game.

(3) Regarding the bonuses of the first BB and the second BB, although the winning probability differs depending on the set value, a bonus may be provided in which the winning probability does not vary depending on the set value. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a transition lottery to an attack mode or the like, an additional lottery, etc. are performed during a bonus whose winning probability does not vary depending on the set value. In other words, there may be a case in which a lottery for transitioning to an attack mode or an additional lottery is performed upon winning a specific combination in the bonus, and a case in which the lottery is not performed. As an opportunity for such a transfer lottery during the bonus, for example, a case where the 39th minor prize winning is established or a case where the 40th minor prize winning is established during the bonus can be considered. Then, the winning mode of the 39th minor prize winning and the 40th minor prize winning may be configured to be different depending on whether or not such a transfer lottery etc. are carried out.

(4) Set value suggestions are calculated based on the winning probability of the eye-pull instruction lottery (the occurrence rate of the eye-pull instruction notification effect), the appearance rate of the third prize mode when winning a strong cherry, and the third and third winning modes when winning a strong watermelon. Although the setting value suggestion is performed based on the appearance rate of the winning mode described in No. 4, the mode of setting value suggestion is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and other modes may be used. For example, it may be configured to suggest a set value by differentiating the performance mode (display content, type of sound effect, etc.) of the eye-press instruction performance, or the sound effect when winning a strong cherry or strong watermelon, the winning performance, etc. The setting value may be suggested based on the occurrence rate or mode of occurrence.

Alternatively, a freeze lottery may be performed when a strong cherry or a strong watermelon is won, and a setting value may be suggested based on the probability of winning the freeze lottery and the type/form of the freeze to be generated. For example, when a strong cherry is won, the winning information is stored as a predetermined subsequent game until the next game, and when the start lever 41 of the next game is operated, each reel 32L is , 32M, and 32R are rotated in reverse at low speed to generate a freeze effect. Then, the setting value is suggested to make a result that matches the white bar in the middle row appear during the freeze performance, and for example, the setting value is suggested to suggest that the setting is 4 or more. In addition, regardless of the setting, the freeze effect is generated with the predetermined probability mentioned above, and the probability that the number that matches the middle white BAR appears during the freeze effect is varied depending on the setting value (with settings 4 or higher, the middle white BAR It may be configured such that the number that matches the BAR appears, but does not appear if the setting is 3 or lower), or if a freeze effect occurs when a strong cherry (strong cherry 2) is won, it will uniformly become a middle row white BAR. After creating a configuration in which rolled numbers appear, the probability of winning a strong cherry with such a freeze effect and the probability of occurrence of a freeze effect are varied depending on the setting value (a setting of 4 or higher causes a freeze effect, and a setting of 3 or less causes a freeze effect). ), or a combination of these may be used to suggest a set value.

In addition, when a strong watermelon is won, the winning information is stored as a predetermined subsequent game until the next game, and when the start lever 41 of the next game is operated, each reel 32L, A freeze effect is generated by rotating 32M and 32R in reverse at a low speed. Then, the setting value is suggested to make the result of the cross black BAR single appear during the freeze performance, for example, the setting value is suggested to suggest that the setting is 3 or more. Further, the setting value is suggested to cause a number of cross black BAR doubles to appear during the freeze performance, and for example, the setting value is suggested to suggest setting 6. In addition, regardless of the settings, the freeze effect is generated with the predetermined probability mentioned above, and the probability that a cross black BAR single set or a cross black BAR double set will appear during the freeze effect is set. It can be configured to vary depending on the value (a setting of 3 or higher will result in a cross black BAR single set, a setting 2 or lower will not appear, and a setting of 6 will result in a cross black BAR double set). Alternatively, if a freeze effect occurs when a predetermined strong watermelon (strong watermelon 2) is won, the result will be a uniform set of cross black BAR singles, and then a predetermined strong effect accompanied by such a freeze effect can be created. The probability of winning a watermelon or the probability of occurrence of a freeze effect may be changed depending on the setting value (a setting of 3 or higher causes a freeze effect to occur, a setting of 2 or less does not cause a freeze effect), or a predetermined strong watermelon (strong Watermelon 3) If a freeze effect occurs at the time of winning, the result will be a uniform cross black BAR double, and the probability of winning a strong watermelon with such a freeze effect and the probability of occurrence of a freeze effect. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the value is changed depending on the setting value (with setting 6, a freeze effect is generated, and with a setting of 5 or less, a freeze effect is not generated). A configuration in which these settings are suggested in combination may be used.

In any case, by making the situation in which such a setting value suggestion is made a situation in which the execution of a lottery for transition to attack mode, etc. or the execution of an additional lottery, execution of such a lottery is restricted by setting value suggestion. It can be used as an alternative to this, and can weaken the impression that it is a loss.

(5) In order to change the winning mode depending on whether or not the winning mode is carried over, the number of medals paid out will be the same as a bonus no matter which winning mode is achieved. You can also do this. Further, even in a configuration in which different winning combinations are won depending on whether or not a carryover state is in progress, the number of medals paid out may be different as a benefit provided for each winning combination. In these cases, by making the number of payouts during the carryover state greater than the number of payouts before the shift to the carryover state, the sense of loss when winning a specific winning combination during the carryover state can be compensated for by acquiring medals.

Further, a configuration in which the number of payouts is different may be used for setting value suggestion. For example, the winning probability of a specific combination that will cause the first number of medals to be paid out when winning a prize during the carryover state, and the winning probability of the specific combination that will cause the second number of medals to be paid out when winning a prize, can be determined by setting values. Make it different. In this way, the setting value can be suggested based on the difference in the number of medals paid out.

(6) As bonus overlapping roles, for specific roles with index values IV = 35 to 48, we have designed a structure in which no transition to attack mode, etc. or additional lottery is performed, but these specific roles as bonus overlapping roles also do not allow attack mode. It may also be configured to perform a transition lottery or an additional lottery. In this case, it is preferable that the probability of winning each combination does not vary depending on the set value. Also, although some of the stop results are common, such as the relationship between strong cherries 1 and 2 and strong cherry 3 and the relationship between strong watermelon 1 to 3 and strong watermelon 4 in the fourth embodiment, The presence or absence of execution of a transition lottery to an attack mode or the like, an additional lottery, etc., and differences in winning probabilities depending on set values may be used for these bonus overlapping combinations.

(7) Based on the specific winning combination, the system is designed to perform a lottery for transition to attack mode, etc., and an additional lottery, and the benefits of such a lottery will occur after the next game, but such benefits will not be applied in the game that triggered the lottery. It may be configured such that it can be enjoyed. For example, by setting up an overlapping role of a specific role and a bell, and making it different depending on the order of pressing whether a specific role winning is established or a bell winning is established, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to notify the pressing order in the game. It is also possible to have a configuration that performs the following.

(8) The winning modes that can be stopped before transitioning to the carryover state and the winning modes that can be stopped during the carryover state are not limited to those described above. For example, during the carryover state, the specific winning combination may be established in a winning manner that becomes a reach when the specific winning combination is won. In this case, each winning mode may be set so that the reachable winnings that appear differ depending on the bonus (first BB or second BB) that triggered the transition to the carryover state.

(9) Although the winning mode is made to differ depending on whether or not a carryover state is in progress, it is also possible to have a structure in which the winning pattern is not established and the stop number of the winning number is changed.

(10) The winning mode that can be stopped during the carryover state may be a winning mode that is composed of symbols adjacent to a bonus symbol that causes bonus transfer. Specifically, for example, the 1st BB winning is when the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line to enter the bonus state, and the "Red 7" symbol adjacent to the "Red 7" symbol on each reel Symbols (for example, the 8th "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the 13th "1st Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R) are identified when they stop on the active line. The structure is such that one strong cherry wins as a winning combination. Then, the draw-in priority during the carryover state is configured to give priority to the bonus over the small winning combination. By doing this, if you win a specific combination while in the carryover state, if you perform the stop operation aiming at the specific combination, you will draw the bonus symbol instead of the symbol corresponding to the specific combination, and a bonus win will occur. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the specific winning combination.

(11) In addition to the 1st BB and 2nd BB, CBs (1st CB to 4th CB) were provided as transitional roles whose small role probability can change depending on the transition of the gaming state, but in addition to or in place of these transitional roles, Other transition roles may also be provided. Other transitional roles include MB (middle bonus), which has no limit on the number of sliding pieces, REG (regular bonus), which has a lower maximum number of acquisitions than the 1st BB and 2nd BB, and the JAC game that can be played in one game. SB (Single Bonus) etc. can be considered. Furthermore, the maximum number of bonuses that can be acquired for each bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit acquisition number during the CB state may be set to 3 pieces, which is less than 15 pieces, or may be set to 0 pieces.

(12) Although the configuration has been described in which medals are not paid out when a transitional combination is won, a configuration may be adopted in which medals are paid out.

(13) A configuration may be adopted in which a transition to attack mode or the like or an additional lottery is performed when a bonus is won, or a configuration in which a transition to attack mode or the like or an additional lottery is performed during the bonus. In this case, the lottery will be conducted at the time of a bonus win or during a bonus where there is no difference in the winning probability, the number of coins won, the probability or advantage of the transition lottery to attack mode, etc. during the bonus, or the additional lottery. It is preferable to configure such a system that these drawings are not performed when a certain bonus is won.

(14) In the lottery process during the carryover state where the bonus winning flag is set, the configuration was such that the bonus winning flag was not set after allowing winnings that overlapped with bonuses, etc.; however, the bonus winning flag was not set. It is also possible to have a configuration in which no one is elected.

(15) In order to avoid any difference in the probability or advantage of the transition lottery to attack mode etc. or the additional lottery depending on the setting value, we designed the lottery to be conducted based on the lottery results with no particular setting difference. Although a lottery is conducted based on a certain lottery result, the benefits at the time of winning (probability, probability of winning in transfer lottery, etc., number of additional games) may be adjusted so that setting differences do not occur. For example, with setting 1, there is a 1/100 probability of winning, and with setting 6, there is a specific combination that has a 1/10 chance of winning, and when the specific combination is won, the winning probability of the attack mode additional lottery is set to 1. In setting 6, it is set to 1/2, and in setting 6, it is set to 1/20. By doing this, the total additional winning probability will be 1/200 no matter which setting value is used, and there will be no difference in setting.

(16) Although the configuration is such that the auxiliary display section 65 mainly generates a setting value suggestion effect, another display section is provided as another notification means, and this separate display section generates a setting value suggestion effect. It may also be configured to generate.

(17) If a specific winning combination is won during a carryover state, the lottery to switch to attack mode, etc., and the additional lottery will not be performed, and instead, the winning mode will change or a setting value will be suggested. However, even with a configuration in which such transition drawings, additional drawings, etc. are not performed (restricting the execution of drawings), the master-slave relationship between the first advantageous state such as a bonus and the second advantageous state such as attack mode etc. Good relationships can be maintained, and the fairness of games is ensured.

(18) Depending on the display mode when transitioning to the carryover state, the winning mode may be different, the probability of occurrence of set value suggestion or eye press instruction notification effect may be different, and the points awarded depending on the stop result may be different. Good too. For example, if the display mode is normal mode and you enter a carryover state, and you win Strong Cherry 1 during this carryover state, and if the display mode is attack mode and you enter a carryover state, and during this carryover state A configuration may be adopted in which whether or not it is possible to stop the middle row white BAR arrangement is different depending on the case where the strong cherry 1 is won.

(19) Depending on the type of RT setting flag when the bonus is won and the RT setting flag clearing process (step S608) is performed, that is, the gaming state at the time of the bonus winning, the winning mode during the carryover state and the setting value suggestion It is also possible to vary the probability of occurrence of the eye press instruction notification performance, or to vary the points awarded depending on the number of stop rolls. For example, if you win a bonus during the 1st RT state and win 1 strong cherry during the carryover state, and when you win a bonus during the 2nd RT state and win 1 strong cherry during the carryover state, It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is determined whether or not all white BARs are available.

(20) The trigger for the transition lottery to attack mode etc. and the additional lottery are not limited to the above-mentioned specific combinations, and for example, these lots may be held based on a push order bell or a push order replay win. Moreover, although the configuration is such that these lottery results are performed as a lottery result corresponding process when each role is won, it may be configured that these lottery results are performed on the condition of winning a prize. Further, it may be configured such that these lottery drawings are performed based on the stop result when each winning combination is won. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which these lottery drawings are performed depending on the number of times each winning combination is won.

(21) Although it has been decided that basically an event advantageous to the player will occur by winning the lottery for transition to attack mode, etc. or the supplementary lottery, for example, it may be configured to perform a lottery for ending attack mode, etc. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is performed to subtract the number of consecutive games.

(22) As a lottery for transition to attack mode, etc., a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to cause a transition to attack mode, etc., but the transition to attack mode, etc. is determined or the transition lottery is executed. It is also possible to perform a subtraction lottery for the number of games.

(23) Although the description has been mainly given to a game in a situation where the number of bets is 3, the above invention may be applied to a 1-bet game where the number of bets is 1 or a 2-bet game where the number of bets is 2. For example, even if a specific winning combination is won when a carryover state is played in a 1-bet game, the winning mode may change. In this case, in order to suppress the loss of medals when winning a bonus, when you are trying to win a bonus in a 1 bet game, when a specific winning combination is won, the lottery to switch to attack mode will not be performed. It can be used as an alternative. In addition, even in a situation where there is no carryover state, if a 3-bet game has a lottery for transitioning to attack mode, etc., but a 1-bet game has a configuration in which a lottery for transitioning to attack mode, etc. is not performed, such a 1-bet game It may also be configured to change the winning mode even when a specific winning combination is won.

(24) Strong Cherry 1 and 2 and Strong Watermelon 1 to 3 were selected as the special winning combinations in which the lottery for transition to attack mode, etc. (such lottery during the carryover state is restricted). The probability of winning the lottery and the number of additional games may be varied. For example, a structure may be adopted in which strong cherry 2 is more likely to win the lottery for entering the attack mode than strong cherry 1, or a structure in which the number of additional games is greater. Further, the winning probability of the transition lottery and the number of additional games may be different for Strong Watermelon 1 to 3, for example, a configuration in which it is easier to win the transition lottery in the order of Strong Watermelon 1, Strong Watermelon 2, and Strong Watermelon 3. Alternatively, the number of additional games may be increased.

(25) The ball output rate changes depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball output rate and setting 6 having the highest ball output rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease in the amount changes. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball payout rates for some setting values are the same and the ball payout rates for other setting values are different, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate. Further, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out. In addition, settings 1 and 5 increase the number of balls in a short period of time and decrease the number of balls in a long period of time, while settings 2, 3, and 4 take a longer time to increase the number of balls than in settings 1 and 5. It takes a shorter time than settings 1 and 5 to reduce the predetermined amount, and setting 6 may have a configuration in which almost no increase or decrease in the number of balls produced occurs. In these cases, the ball payout rate for each set value may be the same.

(26) Generate the white BAR eye press instruction notification performance and the black BAR eye press instruction notification performance as the first stop OFF time performance, and vary whether or not such a performance is generated depending on the stop number of the first stop reel. However, the timing and conditions of occurrence are not limited to this configuration. For example, it may be configured to generate a push instruction notification effect when the reels start rotating, and when a strong cherry is won, a white BAR push instruction notification effect is generated uniformly (by lottery), and when a strong watermelon is won, the push instruction notification effect is generated uniformly (by lottery). It may be configured to generate a black bar push instruction notification effect.

(27) For any or all of Strong Cherry 1 and 2 and Strong Watermelon 1 to 3, the probability of winning is varied depending on the setting value, and the configuration is used as a trigger for a transition lottery to attack mode, etc., an additional lottery, etc. Good too.

(28) Although the configuration is such that the number of stop rolls is made different depending on whether or not the carryover state is in progress, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the mode of the stop drive control before stopping is changed, such as by making the number of slip frames of the slip control different.

(29) Although a slot machine has been described that includes reels and three stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a slot machine that includes five reels and stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel. It may also be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operations in stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and stop switches corresponding thereto. Furthermore, although a slot machine has been described in which the active line is set to 1 line when the number of bets is 3, the present invention is not limited to this configuration; for example, the active line may be 5 lines.

(30) Although a specific example has been shown for the slot machine 10, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, in place of the medal insertion and medal payout functions among slot machines, it may be a gaming machine that has ball insertion and ball payout functions, such as a pachinko machine. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

The inventions shown in each feature group below are as follows: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines.In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions. There is a known configuration in which a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.Specifically, in the case of a slot machine, when a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, an internal lottery is carried out, and the reels start rotating.If the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reel stop result is determined by the internal lottery. If the game machine corresponds to the result of It is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is determined to be advantageous to the player based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position. a transition means for transitioning to the state (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main controller 101 function) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), an advantageous lottery is executed regarding an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the specific state. means (a function of executing the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing by the main control device 101);
In a state in which the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carryover state), if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means for restricting execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means ( A function of executing the process of step S702 by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the game shifts to a specific state that is advantageous to the player, and unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped, winning as a result of the transition is reserved. In such a configuration, if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, an advantageous lottery may be performed regarding an advantageous state different from the specific state, and the chain of the specific state and the advantageous state significantly improves the gameplay. do. However, in a state where the transition to a specific state is confirmed, if the configuration is such that an advantageous lottery is performed regarding an advantageous state, the transition to the specific state may be performed by performing a stopping operation that does not stop the symbol combination for transition. There is a possibility that actions will be taken to prevent the transition from occurring and allow an unlimited number of advantageous lotteries to occur. In this case, the difference in advantage between a player who can perform a stopping operation that does not stop the transfer symbol combination and a player who cannot perform such a stopping operation becomes noticeable, and from the perspective of the fairness of the game. This is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also not preferable from that point of view. Therefore, by configuring a configuration that restricts the execution of advantageous drawings when the transition to a specific state is confirmed, it is possible to achieve the intended payout rate and ensure the fairness of the game. can. As a result of the above, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the "advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state" includes "a lottery to determine whether to move to an advantageous state", "a lottery to determine whether to terminate an advantageous state", "a lottery to determine the continuation rate of an advantageous state", These include ``a lottery for increasing or decreasing the number of consecutive games in an advantageous state'', ``a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous state with multiple stages'', and ``a lottery for transitioning from an advantageous state to another state''.

Feature A2. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is determined to be advantageous to the player based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position. a transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main controller 101 function) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), an advantageous lottery is executed regarding an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the specific state. means (a function of executing the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing by the main control device 101);
In a state in which the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carryover state), if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means for restricting execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means ( A function of executing the process of step S702 by the main controller 101);
When the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means is restricted by the restriction means, the specific benefit granting means (main control A function for executing stop information setting processing by the device 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the game shifts to a specific state that is advantageous to the player, and unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped, winning as a result of the transition is reserved. In such a configuration, if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, an advantageous lottery may be performed regarding an advantageous state different from the specific state, and the chain of the specific state and the advantageous state significantly improves the gameplay. do. However, in a state where the transition to a specific state is confirmed, if the configuration is such that an advantageous lottery is performed regarding an advantageous state, the transition to the specific state may be performed by performing a stopping operation that does not stop the symbol combination for transition. There is a possibility that actions will be taken to prevent the transition from occurring and allow an unlimited number of advantageous lotteries to occur. In this case, the difference in advantage between a player who can perform a stopping operation that does not stop the transfer symbol combination and a player who cannot perform such a stopping operation becomes noticeable, and from the perspective of the fairness of the game. This is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also not preferable from that point of view. Therefore, by configuring a configuration that restricts the execution of advantageous drawings when the transition to a specific state is confirmed, it is possible to achieve the intended payout rate and ensure the fairness of the game. can.

On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the transitional symbol combination itself, there will be many situations in which the execution of an advantageous lottery is restricted due to a specific result, and the player may feel like a loss. Therefore, if such a situation occurs, we have made it possible to provide a specific benefit instead of conducting an advantageous lottery, so that the user does not feel a sense of loss due to the failure of an advantageous lottery. Become. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the "advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state" includes "a lottery to determine whether to move to an advantageous state", "a lottery to determine whether to terminate an advantageous state", "a lottery to determine the continuation rate of an advantageous state", These include ``a lottery for increasing or decreasing the number of consecutive games in an advantageous state'', ``a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous state with multiple stages'', and ``a lottery for transitioning from an advantageous state to another state''.

Feature A3. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result winning can be achieved when each of the orbiting bodies stops in a first stop order, and each orbiting body stops in a first stop order different from the first stop order. It includes an order corresponding result (push order replay, push order bell) that allows a second result win different from the first result to be established when the game stops in the stop order of 2,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order-corresponding result, special notification means (notification of the order of pressing) on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display section 65) is capable of giving special notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order of each of the orbiting bodies; (a function of executing press order notification processing by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the advantageous state is a state in which the special notification is executed by the special notification means.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the result is an order-based result, the winning result differs depending on the stopping order of the orbiting objects, so the degree of advantage for the player can change. In this case, it is thought that the player would like to receive special notification regarding the stopping order. In this respect, in a specific situation where the advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state by the advantageous lottery means is restricted, the player may feel like he or she is at a loss because the processing related to the special notification is not performed. Therefore, the sense of loss can be reduced by providing a specific benefit as a substitute.

Feature A4. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, wherein the specific benefit granting means is capable of giving a suggestion regarding a setting value set by the setting device as the specific benefit.

According to the above configuration, when execution of an advantageous lottery related to an advantageous state is restricted, a setting value suggestion can be notified. The setting value causes a change in the rate of increase or decrease in the rate of increase or decrease in the amount of game media, and information such as which setting value is set can be said to be useful information for the player. More specifically, if a suggestion is given that the increase/decrease rate, etc. of the game media is a high set value, it can be used as motivation to continue playing, and a suggestion that the increase/decrease rate, etc. is a low set value can be provided. If the notification is given, the player can be motivated to move the game machine. Therefore, if a setting value suggestion notification can be made instead of restricting advantageous drawings when a specific result is won as described above, the advantage of setting value suggestion notification and advantageous drawings will be limited. It is possible to realize a game that is balanced with the disadvantages of the above, and not only reduces the sense of loss, but also provides a new game that has a balance between these.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the advantage based on the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means is the same regardless of the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, when an advantageous lottery is held based on a specific result, the advantage of the advantageous lottery is the same regardless of the set value, while the specific benefit granted based on the specific result is the same. It becomes an indication of common setpoints, and completely opposite events can occur based on specific results. By doing so, it is possible to realize an innovative game feature in which a completely opposite phenomenon occurs when a specific result is won depending on whether or not the transition result winning is reserved.

Feature A6. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in a state where the transition result winning is not reserved in the reservation means, the first specific symbol combination (middle white BAR off, cross black BAR) is placed in the valid position. a first means (a function for executing right reel restriction processing by the main control device 101) for controlling the stop drive of each of the orbiting bodies so that the rotation body can be stopped (offset);
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in a state where the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means, a second specific symbol different from the first specific symbol combination is placed in the valid position. A second means (right reel first control unit by the main controller 101) that performs stop drive control of each of the rotating bodies so that combinations (for example, middle stage white BAR set, cross black BAR single set, cross black BAR double set) can be stopped. function to execute restriction release processing and second restriction release processing);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the stop number changes depending on whether an advantageous lottery is performed based on a specific winning result or when a specific benefit is awarded. Due to such changes in the number of stop results, it is possible to prevent people from recognizing that the execution of advantageous drawings is restricted (that it was a specific result), or to make them aware that it was a specific result, but to avoid the feeling of loss. It is possible to give a specific benefit by making a flashy stop result that compensates for this.

Feature A7. In a state where the transition result winning is not reserved in the reservation means, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the second specific symbol combination is stopped at the valid position at a timing when the lottery result is the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature A6, further comprising means for controlling the stop drive of each of the orbiting bodies so that the second specific symbol combination does not stop when the operating means is operated.

According to the above configuration, until the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at the second specific symbol combination, the second specific symbol combination cannot be made to appear. By doing so, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the second specific symbol combination appearing while the transfer result winning is reserved.

Feature A8. The operating timing of the stop operation means that makes it possible to stop the second specific symbol combination in a state where the transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means is a state in which the transition result winning is not reserved in the reservation means. The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the timing is the same as the operation timing of the stop operation means that makes it possible to stop the first specific symbol combination.

According to the above configuration, even if the target timing is the same, whether or not the second specific pattern combination appears will clearly differ depending on whether or not the transfer result is being reserved. In this way, regardless of whether the transfer result is being reserved or not, it is possible to enjoy the effect of varying the stop result without forcing a different stop operation in the case of a specific result.

Feature A9. In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result in a state where the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means, and in the case where the transfer result win is not reserved in the reservation means The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8, characterized in that the type of result that can establish a prize in the game is different depending on the case where the lottery result by the means is the specific result. .

According to the above configuration, there is no need to impose a special control mode in order to make the stop result different depending on whether or not the transition result is being reserved. In other words, if the results that can lead to a winning are the same, special control methods are required, such as changing the winning method itself depending on whether a specific result is reserved or not. If the types of results are different, as in the case of You can expect the effect of making them different.

Feature A10. If the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result in a state where the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means, the specific result is determined as a result that makes it possible to win a prize in the game. If the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result in a state where the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means while a predetermined result (first BB or second BB) different from the above is included, The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that the predetermined result is not included as a result that can lead to winning in the game.

According to the above configuration, when the game is reserved, the predetermined result and the specific result are both won, and when the game is not reserved, the predetermined result is not won. By doing this, it is only necessary to change the control depending on whether or not the predetermined result is a winning result, so that the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the predetermined result is the transition result.

According to the above configuration, when a predetermined result is won, that is, when a transfer result is won, it may be reserved by the reservation means, and if a specific result is won during the reservation, it is possible to win the specific result and the transfer result. An event such as this will occur. In this way, it is not necessary to cause the predetermined result winning to occur repeatedly during reservation, so that the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature A12. The first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination are a common symbol combination (for a strong cherry, a "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and a "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, If it is a strong watermelon, it is set so that the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M) will appear.
A feature characterized in that, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the benefit granting means grants a benefit corresponding to the specific result by stopping the common symbol combination at the valid position. The gaming machine according to any one of A6 to A11.

According to the above configuration, different stop numbers can be made to appear depending on whether or not the game is reserved, without changing the numbers used for winning determination. In this way, there is no need to change the relationship between the lottery results and the numbers for determining winning depending on whether or not the game is reserved.

Feature A13. Regardless of whether or not the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination are placed in the valid position. A third means (right reel restriction by the main controller 101) for controlling the stop drive of each of the rotating bodies so that a third specific symbol combination (triple cherries, all watermelons in the upper row) that is different from the symbol combination can be stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A12, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the third specific symbol combination when the result is a specific result, the third specific symbol combination will appear regardless of whether it is reserved or not, and the stop result will be It does not change. By doing this, depending on whether or not the game is on hold, the number of stop results may or may not change, thereby diversifying the game.

Feature A14. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (weak cherry, weak watermelon) different from the specific result, when the stop operation means is operated at a timing that makes it possible to stop the third specific symbol combination, The stopping operation is performed at a timing that makes it possible to stop the fourth specific symbol combination that makes it possible to establish the special result winning, and at the same time makes it possible to stop the first specific symbol combination or the second specific symbol combination. The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein when the means is operated, the fourth specific symbol combination becomes unstoppable.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where there is a possibility that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result in addition to the specific result, if the third specific symbol combination is not stopped at the timing that makes it possible to stop, the special The fourth specific symbol combination that results in a winning result cannot be stopped, and so-called missed winnings may occur. Therefore, it is thought that the stop operation is usually performed at the timing when the third specific symbol combination can be stopped, increasing the rarity of the first specific symbol combination or the second specific symbol combination appearing. be able to.

Feature A15. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in a state where the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means, the stop operation means is operated at a timing that makes it possible to stop the second specific symbol combination. The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with an instruction presentation means (a function for executing special notification processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing an instruction presentation.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a special result may be missed if a stop operation is performed aiming at the second specific symbol combination, it is possible to make the player aim at the second specific symbol combination by generating the instruction effect. .

Feature A16. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
Feature A15 characterized by comprising a suggestion notification means capable of giving a suggestion notification regarding the set value set by the setting means based on at least one of the frequency of occurrence, the manner of occurrence, and the manner of presentation of the instruction performance. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the setting value is suggested based on the frequency of occurrence, manner of occurrence, and manner of presentation of instruction effects as well as changes in the number of stop results. The setting value causes a change in the rate of increase or decrease in the rate of increase or decrease in the amount of game media, and information such as which setting value is set can be said to be useful information for the player. More specifically, if a suggestion is given that the increase/decrease rate, etc. of the game media is a high set value, it can be used as motivation to continue playing, and a suggestion that the increase/decrease rate, etc. is a low set value can be provided. If the notification is given, the player can be motivated to move the game machine. Therefore, if it is possible to notify the setting value suggestion while on hold as described above, players can play the game while expecting a specific result that will trigger the notification of the setting value suggestion while on hold. This makes it possible to keep the player's interest in the game even if the execution of the advantageous lottery is restricted.

In particular, since the suggestion notification is made in association with the change in the number of stop results as described above, it is possible to make it seem as if the suggestion notification was executed by the player's own stop operation, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, in relation to the "specific benefit granting means", the "suggestion notification means" may be included in the "specific benefit granting means", or the "suggestion notification means" may be the "specific benefit granting means". .

Feature A17. The suggestion notification means performs the suggestion notification when the stop operation means is operated at a timing when the second specific symbol combination can be stopped in a situation where the instruction performance is being performed; Feature A16 characterized in that the suggestion notification is not performed when the stop operation means is operated at a timing when the second specific picture combination cannot be stopped in a situation where the instruction performance is being performed. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, assuming the configuration that there is a possibility of missing out on the special result prize if aiming for the second specific symbol combination, it is possible to vary whether or not the suggestion notification is executed depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means. In other words, it is thought that the stop operation is normally performed in an operation mode that prevents any failure to occur, and based on this premise, the set value can be adjusted by performing the stop operation in a different operation mode than usual. If the suggestion notification is performed, it is possible to motivate the user to perform the stop operation in the different operation mode, and it is possible to suppress the configuration in which the stop result changes that has been prepared to be wasted. I can do it.

Feature A18. The identification results include a first identification result (strong cherry 1, 2) and a second identification result (strong watermelon 1 to 3) different from the first identification result,
The second means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, each of the orbiting bodies is set so that the first type specific symbol combination (all white BARs in the middle row) can be stopped as the second specific symbol combination. Performs stop drive control,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result, the second specific symbol combination is a second specific symbol combination different from the first specific symbol combination (cross black BAR single set, The stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies is performed so that the cross black BAR (double set) can be stopped,
On the first specific rotating body (middle reel 32M) of each of the rotating bodies, the symbols constituting the first type specific symbol combination (the "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M) can be stopped. When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed, the symbols constituting the second type specific symbol combination on the first specific orbiting body become unstoppable, and the symbols constituting the second type specific symbol combination on the first specific orbiting body become unstoppable. If the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed at a timing when the symbols forming the combination can be stopped, the symbols forming the first type specific pattern combination cannot be stopped on the first specific orbiting body. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A17.

According to the above configuration, the first specific result and the second specific result are set as the specific results, and the first type specific pattern combination and the second type specific pattern combination can be stopped during reservation. In this case, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the first type specific pattern combination, the second type specific pattern combination cannot be stopped on the first specific revolving body, and the second specific result is missed. Furthermore, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the second type specific pattern combination, the first type specific pattern combination cannot be stopped on the first specific revolving body, and the first specific result may be missed. In other words, if you win a specific result while you are on hold and aim for the second specific symbol combination (first type specific symbol combination or second type specific symbol combination), there is a risk that you will miss out. Therefore, it is possible to create room for improving the gameplay during reservations, such as by granting specific benefits depending on the balance with the risk.

Feature A19. The stop operation means at a timing that makes it possible to stop the symbols constituting the first type specific symbol combination in a second specific orbiting body (left reel 32L) different from the first specific orbiting body among each of the orbiting bodies. When the stop operation is performed, the symbols constituting the second type specific pattern combination on the second specific orbiting body can also be stopped, and the symbols forming the second type specific symbol combination on the second specific orbiting body are also stopped. If the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed at a timing that makes it possible to stop the symbols, the symbols constituting the first type specific symbol combination in the second specific revolving body also become stoppable. The gaming machine according to feature A18.

According to the above configuration, the second specific orbiting body is not missed regardless of the type of identification result. In this way, by using the first specific orbiting body in which each other's data is missed and the second specific orbiting body in which each other does not miss each other, it is possible to predict whether the result is the first specific result or the second specific result. A game in which each rotating body is stopped is added, making it possible to create a multi-stage game.

Feature A20. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result in a state where the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means, the stop operation means at a timing that makes it possible to stop the first type specific symbol combination. is operated, and if the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result in a state where the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means, at a timing when the second type specific symbol combination can be stopped. The game according to feature A18 or feature A19, characterized in that the game is equipped with an instruction performance means (a function of executing special notification processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing an instruction performance that causes the stop operation means to be operated. Machine.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where the first identification result and the second identification result may be missed, an instruction effect may be performed to cause the stop operation to be performed at each of them. In this way, while retaining the enjoyment of the stop operation, such as determining whether or not there is a dropout, it is possible to avoid the dropout by generating such an instruction effect.

Feature A21. The benefit granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the first specific symbol combination stops at the valid position, a benefit corresponding to the specific result is granted,
Features A6 to 6 are characterized in that even when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the second specific symbol combination stops at the valid position, a benefit corresponding to the specific result is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of A20.

According to the above configuration, even if the stop rolls are different, the bonuses awarded are the same, and it is possible to prevent advantages and disadvantages of the bonuses awarded depending on the target location.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is determined to be advantageous to the player based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position. a transition means for transitioning to the state (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main controller 101 function) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), an advantageous lottery is executed regarding an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the specific state. means (a function of executing the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing by the main control device 101);
In a state in which the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carryover state), if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means for restricting execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means ( A function of executing the process of step S702 by the main controller 101);
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (strong cherry 2, strong watermelon 2, 3) in a state where the transfer result winning is not reserved by the reservation means, the first specific symbol combination is placed in the valid position. a first means (a function of executing right reel restriction processing by the main controller 101) for executing stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies so that (the middle stage white BAR is removed, the cross black BAR is removed) can be stopped;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (strong cherry 2, strong watermelon 2, 3) while the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the first specific symbol is placed in the valid position. a second means for performing stop drive control of each of the rotating bodies so that a second specific pattern combination different from the combination (middle row white BAR all set, cross black BAR single set, cross black BAR double set) can be stopped; A function of executing right reel first restriction release processing and second restriction release processing by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the game shifts to a specific state that is advantageous to the player, and unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped, winning as a result of the transition is reserved. In such a configuration, if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, an advantageous lottery may be performed regarding an advantageous state different from the specific state, and the chain of the specific state and the advantageous state significantly improves the gameplay. do. However, in a state where the transition to a specific state is confirmed, if the configuration is such that an advantageous lottery is performed regarding an advantageous state, the transition to the specific state may be performed by performing a stopping operation that does not stop the symbol combination for transition. There is a possibility that actions will be taken to prevent the transition from occurring and allow an unlimited number of advantageous lotteries to occur. In this case, the difference in advantage between a player who can perform a stopping operation that does not stop the transfer symbol combination and a player who cannot perform such a stopping operation becomes noticeable, and from the perspective of the fairness of the game. This is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also not preferable from that point of view. Therefore, by configuring a configuration that restricts the execution of advantageous drawings when the transition to a specific state is confirmed, it is possible to achieve the intended payout rate and ensure the fairness of the game. can.

On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the transitional symbol combination itself, there will be many situations in which the execution of an advantageous lottery is restricted due to a specific result, and the player may feel like a loss. Therefore, when such a situation occurs, by setting a different stopping result from the case where an advantageous lottery is held based on a specific winning result, such a change in the stopping result will result in an advantageous drawing. Try not to make them aware that the execution of the lottery is restricted (that it was a specific result), or make them aware that it was a specific result, but use a flashy stop result that compensates for the feeling of loss. You can Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the "advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state" includes "a lottery to determine whether to move to an advantageous state", "a lottery to determine whether to terminate an advantageous state", "a lottery to determine the continuation rate of an advantageous state", These include ``a lottery for increasing or decreasing the number of consecutive games in an advantageous state'', ``a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous state with multiple stages'', and ``a lottery for transitioning from an advantageous state to another state''.

Feature B2. The second means is configured to select a specific revolving object (right reel 32R) from among the revolving objects when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in a state where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means. ) is different from the control mode of the stop drive control for the specific orbiting body in the first means, and the stop drive control for an orbiting body different from the specific orbiting body. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the second specific symbol combination can be stopped without changing the control mode.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the stop result is changed depending on whether or not the transfer result winning is pending, the control mode of the stop drive control of all the orbiting bodies is not made different, but it is specified as a part of the orbiting bodies. Since only the control mode of the orbiting bodies is different, it becomes possible to use the same control mode for other orbiting bodies regardless of whether they are on hold or not. In particular, while the transition result winning is pending, it is necessary to notify that the transition to a specific state will occur afterwards, or to stop the so-called reach eyes in order to notify the transition result winning. It is not preferable to require complicated stop drive control to change the stop result. Furthermore, if the stop numbers of the all-orbiting body are stored depending on whether or not they are reserved, and the control mode for each stop result is stored, the amount of stored data may become enormous. Therefore, by adopting the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to realize gaming fun by diversifying the stop results while not increasing the processing load and reducing the amount of stored data.

Feature B3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the benefit granting means selects a circuit different from the specific orbiting body out of the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination at the valid position. Common symbol combinations formed by the body (in Strong Cherry 2, the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R and "White BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, in Strong Watermelon 2 and 3, the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R) The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that a benefit corresponding to the specific result is given based on the fact that the "BAR" symbol and the "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M have stopped.

According to the above configuration, a winning determination based on a specific winning result can be made based on the common symbol combination part, and even if the first specific symbol combination is stopped while it is not being reserved, even if the first specific symbol combination is stopped while it is not being reserved. Even if the second specific symbol combination is stopped, there is no need to change the data for winning a prize determination. Therefore, there is no need to store each piece of data for determining a prize, and the amount of stored data can be further reduced.

Feature B4. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result when the first setting value (Setting 1) is set by the setting means, and the second setting value (Setting 1) different from the first setting value set by the setting means. According to any one of features B1 to B3, the probability is set such that when setting 6) is set, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result is the same probability. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, if the specific result is the same, the winning probability is the same whether the set value is the first set value or the second set value. By doing so, it is possible to provide a game such as a change in the number of stops when a specific result is won, within a range that does not affect the increase/decrease rate or manner of increase/decrease of game media.

Furthermore, by setting the probability of winning to be the same regardless of the set value, it is possible to avoid restrictions on predetermined processing based on results in which the probability of winning varies depending on the set value. Specifically, regarding the above-mentioned advantageous state lottery, if processing related to the instruction function is performed based on the result that the probability of winning varies depending on the setting value, the gameplay of the advantageous state will be affected by the increase/decrease rate of gaming media, etc. There is a possibility that the player will only expect such a game, and the original gameplay of the slot machine, which involves aiming at the symbols and stopping the slot machine, may be neglected. Therefore, it is necessary to restrict advantageous drawings from being conducted based on results with different winning probabilities depending on the set value. It becomes possible to carry out an advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state based on the specific result, and the extensibility of the game is greatly improved by changing the number of stop rolls when the specific result is won.

Note that the above configuration may also be expressed as ``regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result is set to be the same''. good.

Feature B5. Stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies so that the first specific symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position in a state where the transfer result winning is not reserved in the reservation means as a lottery result by the lottery means. is executed, and in a state where the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means, stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies is performed so that the first specific symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position. Special results (strong cherry 3, strong watermelon 4 in the fourth embodiment) are set,
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be either the specific result or the special result in a situation where the first setting value is set by the setting means, and the second setting value is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is either the specific result or the special result is set to be a different probability in a situation where the lottery result is the specific result or the special result.

According to the above configuration, a special result is set in addition to the specific result in which the first specific symbol combination stops, and the probability of winning the combination of the specific result and the special result is different depending on each setting value. Therefore, even if the winning probability of a specific result in which the stop roll changes to a second specific symbol combination is common to each setting value, the winning probability of a specific result that changes to the second specific symbol combination (not a special result) (the specific result) can be used to determine the setting value.

Feature B6. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result when the first setting value (Setting 1) is set by the setting means, and the second setting value (Setting 1) different from the first setting value set by the setting means. According to any one of features B1 to B3, the probability is set such that when setting 6) is set, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result is a different probability. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific result is the same, the probability of winning varies depending on the set value. By doing this, it is possible to make a game in which the stop number changes when a specific result is won depending on the game state, affect the increase/decrease rate and manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and also to make it possible to influence the increase/decrease rate and manner of increase/decrease of the game media. , it is also possible to suggest setting values.

Feature B7. Stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies so that the first specific symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position in a state where the transfer result winning is not reserved in the reservation means as a lottery result by the lottery means. is executed, and in a state where the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means, stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies is performed so that the first specific symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position. Special results (strong cherry 3, strong watermelon 4 in the fourth embodiment) are set,
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be either the specific result or the special result in a situation where the first setting value is set by the setting means, and the second setting value is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be either the specific result or the special result is set to be the same in a situation where

According to the above configuration, a special result is set in addition to the specific result that the first specific symbol combination stops, and before reservation, the appearance rate of the first specific symbol combination is regardless of the setting value. The appearance rate is the same, and the appearance rate of the second specific picture combination during reservation becomes a different appearance rate depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the set value be estimated through the appearance of the second specific symbol combination in the second game state.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the game state is determined to be advantageous to the player based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position. a transition means for transitioning to the state (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main controller 101 function) and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (strong cherry 1 to 3, strong watermelon 1) in which a special symbol combination predetermined in advance stops at the valid position and a privilege is awarded by the privilege granting means. -4) are provided,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result (strong cherry 3, strong watermelon 4) among the specific results, an advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the specific state is performed. On the other hand, if the second specific result (strong cherry 1, 2, strong watermelon 1 to 3) is different from the first specific result among the specific results, the advantageous lottery means (main control (a function of executing the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing by the device 101);
In a state in which the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carryover state), if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means for restricting execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means ( A function of executing the process of step S702 by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the game shifts to a specific state that is advantageous to the player, and unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped, winning as a result of the transition is reserved. In such a configuration, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first specific result, an advantageous lottery may be performed regarding an advantageous state different from the specific state, and the chain of the specific state and the advantageous state greatly improves the gameplay. improve. However, in a state where the transition to a specific state is confirmed, if the configuration is such that an advantageous lottery is performed regarding an advantageous state, the transition to the specific state may be performed by performing a stopping operation that does not stop the symbol combination for transition. There is a possibility that actions will be taken to prevent the transition from occurring and allow an unlimited number of advantageous lotteries to occur. In this case, the difference in advantage between a player who can perform a stopping operation that does not stop the transfer symbol combination and a player who cannot perform such a stopping operation becomes noticeable, and from the perspective of the fairness of the game. This is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also not preferable from that point of view. Therefore, by configuring a configuration that restricts the execution of advantageous drawings when the transition to a specific state is confirmed, it is possible to achieve the intended payout rate and ensure the fairness of the game. can.

On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the transitional symbol combination itself, there will be many situations in which the execution of an advantageous lottery is restricted due to a specific result, and the player may feel like a loss. In this regard, in the above configuration, a second specific result is provided as a result of a specific symbol combination stopping and winning as the same stopping result as the first specific result that triggers an advantageous lottery, and the second specific result is advantageous. I decided not to hold a lottery. Therefore, while the transfer results are pending, it is visually unclear whether the execution of an advantageous lottery was restricted due to the winning of the first specific result, or whether the execution of the advantageous lottery was not executed in the first place due to the winning of the second specific result. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of loss due to the fact that the advantageous lottery is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the "advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state" includes "a lottery to determine whether to move to an advantageous state", "a lottery to determine whether to terminate an advantageous state", "a lottery to determine the continuation rate of an advantageous state", These include ``a lottery for increasing or decreasing the number of consecutive games in an advantageous state'', ``a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous state with multiple stages'', and ``a lottery for transitioning from an advantageous state to another state''.

Feature C2. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the advantage based on the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means is the same regardless of the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, when an advantageous lottery is performed based on a specific result, the degree of advantage due to the advantageous lottery is the same regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game based on the advantageous lottery from being affected by changes in the increase/decrease rate of the game media, etc., and to make the game based on the so-called slot machine's main game, which is the main game of the slot machine, by aiming at the symbols and receiving benefits. This can strengthen the impression that this is an incidental game to the game of gaining.

Feature C3. a probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second specific result when a first setting value (setting 1) is set by the setting means; and a second setting different from the first setting value by the setting means. The game according to feature C2, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second specific result when the value (setting 6) is set is set to be a different probability. Machine.

According to the above configuration, among the first specific result and the second specific result in which the advantageous lottery is executed or not even if the same stop result is obtained, the probability of winning for the second specific result differs depending on the set value. It happens. In other words, the occurrence rate of an event in which a player does not win an advantageous lottery even if a specific symbol combination appears can be varied depending on the set value. As a result, the same event can occur without changing the probability of winning on the first specific result side or the probability of winning the advantageous lottery depending on the set values.

Feature C4. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result or the second specific result in a state where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery result is the first specific result or the second specific result. It is equipped with a suggestion notification means (a function of executing the right reel restriction process by the main control device 101, a function of executing the process of step S2211 by the display control device 81) capable of executing a suggestion notification indicating that it is a specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

According to the above configuration, if the first specified result or the second specified result is won in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved, the restriction by the restriction means is performed depending on whether the advantageous lottery is executed or not. Although it is difficult to understand what the restriction was, there are cases where a suggestion is made that suggests whether it was the first identification result or the second identification result. , it is possible to add a game in which you have to guess the point that is difficult to understand, thereby increasing the game's interest.

Feature C5. The suggestion notification means is configured to determine whether the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result. The game machine according to feature C4, characterized in that the suggestion notification can be performed by changing the mode of stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies depending on the specific result.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suggest which result is the first specific result and the second specific result in which the stop result is the same, by making the mode of the stop drive control different when it is on hold. , it is possible to play a game in which the outcome is estimated based on the difference in the stop drive control during such reservation.

Feature C6. The suggestion notification means is
special control that makes it possible to stop a symbol combination different from the specific symbol combination when the lottery result by the lottery device is the first specific result in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation device; The execution rate of (the right reel first restriction cancellation process and the second restriction cancellation process by the main controller 101) is the first execution rate,
special control that makes it possible to stop a symbol combination different from the specific symbol combination when the lottery result by the lottery device is the second specific result in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation device; By setting the execution rate of (the right reel first restriction release process and second restriction release process by the main controller 101) to a second execution rate different from the first execution rate,
The gaming machine according to feature C5, characterized in that it is possible to perform the suggestion notification.

According to the above configuration, the set value can be estimated based on the change in the number of stop results. In this case, the stop roll may change for the first specific result, and the stop roll may change for the second specific result, so the first specific result and the second specific result may be different. It can be used as a suggestion while enjoying the effect of making it difficult to understand.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result, and the game state is changed to game based on the fact that the first transition symbol combination corresponding to the first transition result has stopped at the valid position. the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result, and a second transition pattern corresponding to the second transition result is placed in the valid position. A transition means (execution of bonus state processing by the main controller 101) that shifts the gaming state to a second specific state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the first specific state based on the combination being stopped. function) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first transition result or the second transition result, the symbol combination for the first transition stops at the valid position or the symbol combination for the second transition stops. a reservation unit (a function for executing the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) that reserves the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning until the
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), it is an advantageous state for the player and is different from the first specific state and the second specific state. an advantageous lottery means (a function of executing the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes an advantageous lottery regarding
In a state where the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carryover state), if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the advantageous lottery result by the advantageous lottery means A restriction means for restricting the execution of the lottery (a function for executing the process of step S702 by the main controller 101);
When the first transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the restricting means restricts execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means, a first specific control is executed based on the specific result winning. means (a function for executing stop information setting processing in a situation where the first BB winning flag is set by the main control device 101);
When the second transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the restricting means restricts execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means, a second transition result winning is reserved based on the specific result winning, and the first specific control is different from the first specific control. 2. A second means for executing specific control (a function for executing stop information setting processing in a situation where the second BB winning flag is set by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result or the second transition result, and the first transition result or When the symbol combinations for the first transition and the symbol combinations for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result are stopped, a specific state advantageous to the player is entered, and these symbol combinations for the first and second transition are stopped. If not, the winning of the first transition result and the winning of the second transition result are reserved. In such a configuration, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, an advantageous lottery may be performed regarding an advantageous state different from the first specific state or the second specific state, and the first specific state or the second specific state The gameplay is greatly improved by the chain of states and advantageous states. However, in a state where the transition to the first specific state or the second specific state is confirmed, if the configuration is such that an advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state is performed, the symbol combinations for the first and second transition will not be stopped. There is a possibility that an action may be taken to prevent the transition to the first specified state or the second specified state from occurring easily, such as by performing a stop operation, and to cause an unlimited number of advantageous lotteries to occur. In this case, the difference in advantage between a player who is able to perform a stopping operation that does not stop the first and second transition symbol combinations and a player who is unable to perform such a stopping operation becomes noticeable, and the game becomes more difficult. This is not desirable from a fairness standpoint, and it is also undesirable from that standpoint because the payout rate may differ from the intended payout rate in the first place. Therefore, in a state where the transition to the first specific state or the second specific state is confirmed, by restricting the execution of the advantageous lottery, it is possible to achieve the intended payout rate as described above, and to improve the game. Fairness can be ensured.

On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the symbol combinations used for the first and second transitions, there are many situations in which the execution of an advantageous lottery is restricted due to a specific result, resulting in a loss for the player. It can be a mood. In this regard, in the above configuration, different specific control is performed depending on whether a specific result is won while the first specific state is reserved and if a specific result is won while the second specific state is reserved. . Therefore, although no advantageous lottery is executed, a game is added in which it is possible to predict which specific state the reservation is in through the different specific controls. This makes it possible to realize a novel game in which a specific state in which specific control is performed on the advantageous side is reserved, and the player is made to hope for a specific result that is subject to restrictions on the advantageous lottery. Therefore, interest can be suitably improved.

In addition, the "advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state" includes "a lottery to determine whether to move to an advantageous state", "a lottery to determine whether to terminate an advantageous state", "a lottery to determine the continuation rate of an advantageous state", These include ``a lottery for increasing or decreasing the number of consecutive games in an advantageous state'', ``a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous state with multiple stages'', and ``a lottery for transitioning from an advantageous state to another state''.

Feature D2. The identification results include a first identification result (strong cherry 1, strong watermelon 1) and a second identification result (strong cherry 2, strong watermelon 2, 3),
The first means may perform the first specific control based on the first specific result and the first specific control based on the second specific result. or the second means may perform the second specifying control based on the first specifying result and execute the second specifying control based on the second specifying result. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the gaming machine has at least one of the following: a configuration in which the control mode of the second specific control can be made different depending on when the second specific control is executed.

According to the above configuration, the control mode during the reservation differs depending on not only the reserved transfer result but also the type of the specific result. By doing this, for example, in the case of a predetermined specific result (first specific result), if specific control (first specific control) is performed in a predetermined control mode, the first transition result will be won. It is possible to realize a game that can be predicted such as being reserved.

Feature D3. A winning notifying means (a bonus winning notifying process by the display control device 81) that can be executed by a predetermined notifying means to notify the winning that the lottery result by the lottery means has become the first transition result or the second transition result. functions),
The winning notification means is characterized in that it is capable of executing the winning notification at a timing before the first specific control by the first means or the second specific control by the second means is executed. The gaming machine described in feature D2.

According to the above configuration, which transition result winning is reserved can be notified at a timing before the first specific control and the second specific control. By doing so, in the configuration of feature D2, instead of predicting the type of transition result from the control mode of the specific control, after understanding the transition result based on the winning notification, the specific control based on the specific result winning can be shown, and the degree of attention at the time of winning such a specific result is greatly improved.

Feature D4. Result notification means (by display control device 81) that can be executed by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means to notify that the lottery result by the lottery means has become the first specified result or the second specified result. Equipped with a function to execute specific role notification processing),
The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the result notification means is capable of executing the result notification at a later timing than the winning notification by the winning notification means.

According to the above configuration, specific control can be shown after understanding the types of reserved transition results and the types of winning specific results. By doing so, the degree of attention to the specific control is greatly improved.

Feature D5. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second transition result are set as different probabilities,
A feature characterized in that a benefit granted by performing the first specific control by the first means and a benefit granted by performing the second specific control by the second means are different. The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D4.

According to the above configuration, the winning results of the first transition result and the second transition result are made different, and different benefits are provided depending on the reserved transition result. Therefore, in relation to the benefits that can be obtained, expectations can be varied, such as which transition result is preferable for winning. By doing this, you can take advantage of the fact that reserved advantageous drawings are restricted, and create a completely different gameplay experience than the conventional one, where you can move to a specific state and receive benefits based on the transition result winnings. It can be realized.

Feature D6. As the lottery result by the lottery means, special results (strong cherry 3, strong watermelon 4 in the fourth embodiment) that do not trigger the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means are provided,
Either the first means or the second means executes the corresponding specific control based on the special result winning in a situation where the corresponding transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the gaming machine is capable of:

According to the above configuration, specific control is performed even on the basis of a special result winning that does not trigger an advantageous lottery, so it is possible to make various events for which specific control is performed during reservation. Furthermore, it is visually difficult to understand whether the specific control was performed after restricting the advantageous lottery when a specific result was won, or whether the specific control was performed when the special result was won when no advantageous lottery was held in the first place. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the gameplay of predicting the reserved transition result from the specific result and specific control, or predicting the specific result or specific control from the announced transition result.

Feature D7. By performing the first specific control, a stopped roll is made in a state in which the winning of the first transition result is not reserved by the reservation means, and a state in which the winning of the first transition result is reserved by the reservation means. It is possible that the stopping result in
By performing the second specific control, a stopped roll is made in a state where the second transition result winning is not reserved by the reservation means, and a state where the second transition result win is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the number at which the stop result can be different from that at the end of the game.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to predict which transition result is reserved based on the stop result. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the eye-pressing operation and make the player familiar with the original gameplay of the slot machine.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the stop roll when the specific result is won is different depending on whether the first specific control is performed or the second specific control is performed.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature D7 can be more suitably achieved.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result (1st BB, 2nd BB), and the first transition symbol combination corresponding to the first transition result has stopped at the valid position. Based on this, the gaming state is shifted to a first specific state (bonus state) that is advantageous for the player, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a second transition result different from the first transition result, and the effective position A transition means (main controller 101 function to perform bonus state processing), and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result, a reservation means (main controller 101 function to execute the process of step S609);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), an advantageous lottery is executed regarding an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the specific state. means (a function of executing the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing by the main control device 101);
In a state where the first transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carryover state), if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction that limits execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means. means (a function for executing the process of step S702 by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
As the lottery result by the lottery means, special results (2nd minor role to 26th minor role) different from the first transition result and the second transition result are provided,
The specific result is set as a specific overlap result of the second transition result and the special result,
In a state where the first transition result winning is not reserved by the reservation means, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific duplicate result winning, the second transition result winning can be established in each of the rounds. While performing stop drive control of the body, in a state where the first transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific duplicate result winning, the special result winning can be established. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific control means (a function for executing stop information setting processing by the main control device 101) that performs stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies as follows.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result or the second transition result, and the first transition result or When the pattern combination for the first transition and the pattern combination for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result are stopped, a transition is made to the corresponding specific state. If the symbol combination for the first transition does not stop, the winning as a result of the first transition is reserved. In such a configuration, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, an advantageous lottery may be performed regarding an advantageous state different from the first specific state or the second specific state, and the first specific state or the second specific state The gameplay is greatly improved by the chain of states and advantageous states. However, in a state where the transition to the first specific state is confirmed, if the configuration is such that an advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state is performed, a stopping operation that does not stop the symbol combination for the first transition may be performed. , there is a possibility that an action may be taken to prevent the transition to the first specific state from occurring easily and to cause advantageous lotteries to occur without limit. In this case, the difference in advantage between a player who can perform a stopping operation that does not stop the first transition symbol combination and a player who cannot perform such a stopping operation becomes noticeable, and the fairness of the game is affected. This is not preferable from this point of view, and since the payout rate may differ from the intended payout rate due to the design, it is also not preferable from that point of view. Therefore, in a state where the transition to the first specific state or the second specific state is confirmed, by restricting the execution of the advantageous lottery, it is possible to achieve the intended payout rate as described above, and to improve the game. Fairness can be ensured.

On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the symbol combination for the first transition, there will be many situations in which the execution of an advantageous lottery is restricted due to a specific result, and the player will feel like he has lost out. obtain. On that point, in the above configuration, the specific result that triggers the advantageous lottery is the specific overlap result of the second transition result and the special result, and if it is not reserved, the second transition result winning is established, and while it is reserved, the second transition result winning is established. Since the configuration is such that special result winnings are established, it is possible to change the winning result depending on whether the winning result is reserved or not, depending on whether the winning result is an opportunity for an advantageous lottery. More specifically, although the system shifts to the second specific state before reservation, it does not shift to the second specific state during reservation, depending on the advantage based on these second specific states and special result winnings. , the degree of advantage at the time of winning a specific result can be changed depending on whether or not it is reserved. Therefore, even if the advantageous lottery is restricted, it is possible to give meaning to specific winning results, and it is possible to suitably improve interest.

In addition, the "advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state" includes "a lottery to determine whether to move to an advantageous state", "a lottery to determine whether to terminate an advantageous state", "a lottery to determine the continuation rate of an advantageous state", These include ``a lottery for increasing or decreasing the number of consecutive games in an advantageous state'', ``a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous state with multiple stages'', and ``a lottery for transitioning from an advantageous state to another state''.

Feature E2. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a normal result (push order bell) that does not include the second transition result but includes the special result,
Feature E1 characterized in that the advantageous lottery means does not perform the advantageous lottery or does not shift to the advantageous state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the normal result winning. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, if the normal result is won, the result will be that the advantageous lottery will not be held or the advantageous lottery will not change to an advantageous state, so from the perspective of whether or not such an advantageous lottery will be executed, there will be a difference between the normal result winning and the pending The specific duplicate result will be the same as when winning. Moreover, if a specific duplicate result is won during reservation, a special result prize can be established, and similarly, a special result prize can be established even if a regular result is won. In this case, it becomes difficult for the player to understand whether the special result winning was achieved based on the specific duplicate result winning or the special result winning was achieved based on the normal result winning during the reservation period, and the player becomes in an advantageous situation. It is no longer clear whether the lack of transition is due to the restriction on the execution of advantageous lotteries. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of loss due to the advantageous lottery being restricted even though he or she has won a specific duplicate result while on hold.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the normal result is higher than the probability that the specific duplicate result is a winning result.

According to the above configuration, the normal result has a higher probability of winning than the specific duplicate result. Therefore, in the event that a specific duplicate result is won during reservation, the event of winning the special result may give a stronger impression that it is based on the normal result winning than the event that is based on the specific duplicate result winning. I can do it. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous lottery based on the specific duplicate result (specific result) winning is restricted.

Feature E4. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result winning and a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the valid position, the benefit granting means is configured to award a predetermined number of prizes as a benefit corresponding to the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result winning and a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the valid position. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the gaming machine pays out gaming media.

According to the above configuration, the special result is a so-called small win in which game media are paid out. By doing so, the degree of freedom in control when a specific duplicate result is won is greatly improved. In other words, for example, if it is a replay winning combination, it is necessary to avoid missing out, but if you try to make a second transition result winning without winning the replay as a special result when a specific duplicate result is won, the second transition result won. It is also necessary to control the results of the 2nd shift so that no losses occur, and to give priority to winnings over replays. On the other hand, if it is a small winning combination as described above, it is possible to miss a win, so the degree of freedom of control can be improved without being subject to such restrictions.

Feature E5. The lottery means includes means for preventing the first transition result or the second transition result from being won in a situation where at least one of the first transition result and the second transition result has been won. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4.

According to the above configuration, so-called duplicate winning of bonuses is prevented, and the ball payout rate is prevented from increasing excessively. By using a configuration that prevents such duplicate winnings, if a specific duplicate result is won in a situation where the first transition result is reserved, a special result winning will be established instead of a second transition result winning. The configuration of feature E1 can be easily realized.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As gaming states, there are a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (carryover state) different from the first gaming state,
In the first game state, if the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (strong cherry 2, strong watermelon 2, 3), a first specific symbol combination (middle white BAR off, cross black BAR off) is placed in the valid position. ) is executed to stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies so that the orbiting bodies can be stopped, and when the lottery result by the lottery means in the second game state is the specific result, a specific lap of each of the orbiting bodies is executed. By making the control mode of the stop drive control for the body (right reel 32R) different from the control mode when the lottery result by the lottery means in the first gaming state is the specific result, the first Stop drive control of each of the rotating bodies is executed so that a second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination (middle row white BAR set, cross black BAR single set, cross black BAR double set) can be stopped. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specific control means (a function for executing stop information setting processing by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, different stop outcomes may be stopped depending on changes in the gaming state even for the same lottery result. be. In this case, the control mode of the stop drive control of all the orbiting bodies is not made different, but only the control manner of a specific orbiting body as a part of the orbiting bodies is different, so that the other orbiting bodies are not affected regardless of the game state. It becomes possible to utilize similar control modes. By doing this, compared to a configuration in which the control mode of the all-round rotating body is stored for each game state, it is possible to reduce the amount of stored data and to achieve a diversification of stop results. I can do it.

Feature F2. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the benefit granting means selects a circuit different from the specific orbiting body out of the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination at the valid position. Common symbol combinations formed by the body (in Strong Cherry 2, the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R and "White BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, in Strong Watermelon 2 and 3, the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R) The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that a privilege corresponding to the specific result is given based on the stoppage of the "BAR" symbol and the "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M.

According to the above configuration, a prize winning determination based on a specific result winning can be performed based on a common symbol combination part, and even if the first specific symbol combination is stopped in the first gaming state, even if the first specific symbol combination is stopped in the second gaming state Even if the second specific symbol combination stops in , there is no need to change the data for winning a prize determination. Therefore, in the configuration of feature F1, it is not necessary to store not only the control mode but also the data for winning determination for each gaming state, and it is possible to further reduce the amount of stored data.

Feature F3. The specific control means restricts a predetermined specific symbol from stopping at a predetermined position of the specific revolving body in the first gaming state (for example, a "white BAR" symbol is placed in the middle row, and a "black bar" symbol is placed in the upper and lower rows). On the other hand, in the feature F1 or feature F2, the feature F1 or F2 is characterized in that the specific symbol is allowed to stop at the predetermined position of the specific revolving body in the second game state. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, for the specific revolving body, the only difference is whether or not the specific pattern stops at a predetermined position, so the configuration can be significantly simplified. In particular, by having such a restricting/allowing configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from stopping even if the second specific symbol combination is aimed at in the first gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an event in which the stop results are unintentionally stopped due to the timing of the stop operation, even though the stop results are different.

Feature F4. In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a symbol combination different from the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination is placed in the valid position. 3. Means for executing stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies (a function for executing right reel restriction processing by the main controller 101) so that a specific symbol combination (triple cherries, upper row watermelon) can be stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3.

According to the above configuration, as long as the stop operation is performed aiming at the third specific symbol combination, the stop result does not change regardless of the gaming state. In other words, it is possible to realize a game in which the stop number changes depending on the game state and a game in which the stop result does not change with the simple configuration described in feature F1.

Feature F5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the benefit granting means selects a circuit different from the specific orbiting body out of the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination at the valid position. Common symbol combinations formed by the body (in Strong Cherry 2, the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R and "White BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, in Strong Watermelon 2 and 3, the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R) BAR" symbol and "White BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M) are given a benefit corresponding to the specific result based on the stoppage, and the third specific symbol combination stops at the valid position. Benefits corresponding to the specific results are granted based on the
If a stop operation is performed on the specific orbiting object in a situation where at least the common symbol combination part is not stopped, the symbols constituting the third specific symbol combination in the specific orbiting object will stop at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature F4, further comprising means for performing stop drive control so as to perform stop drive control.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a third specific symbol combination is provided as a stop result corresponding to a specific result, in addition to the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination, for example, When a stop operation is performed from the body, it becomes clear which stop roll is to be stopped. In other words, when a stop operation is performed on a specific rotating body that is a different part between the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination, the first specific symbol combination or the first specific symbol combination is determined depending on the gaming state. 2. If the stop drive control is to be performed so as to leave room for a specific symbol combination to be established, it becomes necessary to perform such control while determining the gaming state. On that point, if the stop operation is performed from the specific orbiting body, the control can be improved by giving priority to stopping the third specific symbol combination instead of the first specific symbol combination or the second specific symbol combination. This makes it possible to simplify the process.

Feature F6. The identification results include a first identification result (strong watermelon 2) and a second identification result (strong watermelon 3) different from the first identification result,
The specific control means is
In the first gaming state, when the lottery results by the lottery means are the first specific result and the second specific result, each of the orbiting bodies is arranged so that the first specific symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position. While performing stop drive control,
In the second game state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, by changing the control mode of the specific orbiting body, the first type is placed in the valid position as the second specific symbol combination. Execute stop drive control of each of the rotating bodies so that a specific pattern combination (cross black BAR single set) can be stopped,
In the second game state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result, by changing the control mode of the specific orbiting body, the second specific symbol combination is placed in the valid position, and the lottery result is the second specific result. Features F1 to F1 are characterized in that the stop drive control of each of the rotating bodies is executed so that a second type specific pattern combination (cross black BAR double alignment) different from the first type specific pattern combination can be stopped; The gaming machine according to any one of F5.

According to the above configuration, in the first gaming state, the first specific symbol combination stops regardless of whether it is the first specific result or the second specific result, and in the second gaming state, the first specific symbol combination stops. In this case, the first type specific pattern combination is stopped, and in the case of the second specific result, the second type specific pattern combination is stopped. That is, in the first gaming state, it is not possible to determine the winning result from the stopped numbers, but in the second gaming state, it is possible to determine the winning result from the stopped numbers. By doing this, it becomes possible to play a game in which the winning result is determined from the number of stopped rolls depending on the game state, and such a game can be realized by simply changing the control mode for a specific revolving object. This makes it possible to realize new gameplay while reducing the amount of stored data for control modes.

Feature F7. Feature F6 is characterized in that the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first specified result and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second specific result are set as different probabilities. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, in the second gaming state, the probability that the first type specific symbol combination appears is different from the probability that the second type specific symbol combination appears. By doing this, the side with a lower probability of appearance will have a higher sense of joy (feeling of rareness) when it appears, and a game experience that will make you look forward to seeing which pattern combination will appear is realized. In addition, for example, in a configuration where the benefits given to the player differ depending on which symbol combination appears, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations based on the relationship between the probability of appearance and the benefits given. I can do it.

Feature F8. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result when the first setting value (Setting 1) is set by the setting means, and the second setting value (Setting 1) different from the first setting value set by the setting means. According to any one of features F1 to F7, the probability is set such that when setting 6) is set, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result is the same probability. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, if the specific result is the same, the winning probability is the same whether the set value is the first set value or the second set value. By doing so, it is possible to provide a game such as a change in the number of stops when a specific result is won, within a range that does not affect the increase/decrease rate or manner of increase/decrease of game media.

Furthermore, by setting the probability of winning to be the same regardless of the set value, it is possible to avoid restrictions on predetermined processing based on results in which the probability of winning varies depending on the set value. Specifically, regarding the processing related to the so-called push order instruction function that allows the benefits obtained to be different depending on the stopping order of each orbiting object even if the result is the same, the winning probability is different depending on the setting value. If processing related to the instruction function is performed, there is a possibility that the game based on the instruction function will affect the increase/decrease rate of the game media, etc., and the slot machine will stop aiming at the original pattern while expecting only such a game. There is a possibility that the game aspect of letting the player play is ignored. Therefore, it is necessary to restrict the processing related to the instruction function from being performed based on results with different winning probabilities depending on the setting value, but in that respect, by setting the winning probability to be the same for a specific result regardless of the setting value, Processing related to the instruction function can also be performed based on the specific result, and the extensibility of the game, such as changing the stop number when the specific result is won, is greatly improved.

The above configuration may also be expressed as "regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result is set to be the same". good.

Feature F9. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result when the first setting value (Setting 1) is set by the setting means, and the second setting value (Setting 1) different from the first setting value set by the setting means. According to any one of features F1 to F7, the probability is set such that when setting 6) is set, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result is a different probability. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific result is the same, the probability of winning varies depending on the set value. By doing this, it is possible to make a game in which the stop number changes when a specific result is won depending on the game state, affect the increase/decrease rate and manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and also to make it possible to influence the increase/decrease rate and manner of increase/decrease of the game media. , it is also possible to suggest setting values.

Feature F10. As a lottery result by the lottery means, in the first game state, stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies is executed so that the first specific symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and in the second game state In this, a special result (strong cherry 3, strong watermelon 4 in the fourth embodiment) is obtained in which the stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies is executed so that the first specific symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position. is set,
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be either the specific result or the special result in a situation where the first setting value is set by the setting means, and the second setting value is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature F9, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be either the specific result or the special result in a situation where the lottery result is the same as the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result or the special result is set to be the same.

According to the above configuration, the appearance rate of the first specific symbol combination in the first game state is the same regardless of the setting value, and the appearance rate of the second specific symbol combination in the second gaming state depends on the setting value. The appearance rate will be different. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the set value be estimated through the appearance of the second specific symbol combination in the second game state.

Feature F11. The gaming machine according to feature F10, wherein a plurality of types of the specific results are provided as the lottery results by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, by adjusting the winning probabilities of multiple types of specific results, the total winning probability of specific results and special results can be set to the set value without changing the winning probability of the special result side depending on the set value. The probability can be set to be the same regardless of the Therefore, in a game in which the appearance rate of the first specific symbol combination is made common by the set value in the first game state, but the appearance rate of the second specific symbol combination is varied depending on the set value in the second game state, The degree of freedom in processing based on special results can be improved.

In addition, the above-mentioned configuration is based on "the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result in a situation where the first set value is set by the setting means, and the second set value is set by the setting means. The above effect can be more clearly achieved by making the limitation that "the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will have the same probability as the special result in a situation where .

Feature F12. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result winning can be achieved when each of the orbiting bodies stops in a first stop order, and each orbiting body stops in a first stop order different from the first stop order. It includes an order corresponding result (push order replay, push order bell) that allows a second result win different from the first result to be established when the game stops in the stop order of 2,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order-corresponding result, special notification means (notification of the order of pressing) on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display section 65) is capable of giving special notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order of each of the orbiting bodies; (a function of executing press order notification processing by the display control device 81);
A special processing means capable of performing processing related to the special notification based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result (executes the first specific winning combination processing to the third specific winning processing by the main control device 101) function) and
The gaming machine according to feature F10 or feature F11, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the result is an order-based result, the winning result differs depending on the stopping order of the orbiting objects, so the degree of advantage for the player can change. In this case, it is thought that the player would like to receive special notification regarding the stopping order. In this regard, since special notification processing is performed when a special result is won in which the first specific symbol combination appears in the first gaming state, the game is played while expecting the first specific symbol combination to appear. It is considered that the Since the first specific symbol combination appears not only in the special result but also when the specific result is won, even if the configuration does not perform the processing related to special notification when the specific result is won, it will be as if the special notification would also be issued for the specific result. This makes it possible to make people think that processing related to this is being carried out. In other words, when the first specific symbol combination appears, it cannot be determined from the stop roll whether it is triggered by a special result or a specific result. ), it is possible to leave open the possibility that processing related to special notification is being performed. Therefore, expectations for the first specific pattern combination can be increased.

In addition, the above-mentioned structure will produce the above-mentioned effect more clearly if the limitation that "the said identification result does not become the execution trigger of the process regarding the said special notification by the said special processing means" is added.

Feature F13. The gaming machine according to feature F12, wherein in the second gaming state, execution of processing related to the special notification by the special processing means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, in the second game state where the stop number changes, execution of the process related to the special notification by the special processing means is restricted, so that the first specific symbol combination appears as a special result. However, no processing will be performed regarding the special notification. On the other hand, if it is a specific result, a second specific symbol combination will appear and the set value can be determined, so even if processing related to special notification is not performed, the player can receive useful information. It may be possible to obtain information. In this way, in the second gaming state, when a special result or a specific result is won, the player may By varying the emotion given (degree of disappointment, etc.), interest in the stop result can be increased. In addition, in the second gaming state, by making it possible for not only useful information to be presented (processing related to special notifications is restricted), for example, transition from the second gaming state to another gaming state is possible. If it is possible to do so, it becomes possible to realize a game in which the player is transferred to the other game state while considering the balance of these advantageous and disadvantageous events.

Feature F14. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a non-trigger result (strong cherry 1, strong watermelon 1) that does not trigger the execution of the process related to the special notification by the special processing means is provided,
In the first game state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the non-trigger result, stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies is executed so that the first specific symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position. , when the lottery result by the lottery means in the second gaming state is the non-trigger result, stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies is executed so that the first specific symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position. is,
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the non-trigger result in a situation where the first set value is set by the setting means, and the lottery result in a situation where the second set value is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature F12 or feature F13, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the means is the non-trigger result is set to be a different probability.

According to the above configuration, there is provided a non-trigger result that has a winning probability that differs depending on the setting value and does not trigger the execution of the process related to special notification, and the non-trigger result changes the stop roll depending on the gaming state. Instead, the first specific symbol combination appears in both the first game state and the second game state. By providing such a result in addition to the specific result or special result, the setting value can be suggested through the appearance rate of the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination in the second gaming state. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to which symbol combination appears in the second game state.

Furthermore, when the above configuration is applied to a configuration in which execution of processing related to special notification is restricted in the second gaming state, the appearance of the first specific symbol combination in the second gaming state can be detected as a special result and related to special notification. It is also possible to have the effect of making it difficult to understand whether the execution of the process was restricted or whether it was a non-trigger result and the process related to the special notification was not performed in the first place.

Feature F15. The specific control means is configured to control a predetermined pattern (red bell, white bell) predetermined at the effective position of the specific revolving body in the first game state and a specific pattern (white BAR, black BAR) different from the predetermined pattern. Among them, the stop drive control of the specific revolving body is executed so that the predetermined symbol can be stopped preferentially, and the predetermined symbol and the specific symbol are placed in the effective position of the specific revolving body in the second game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F14, characterized in that the stop drive control of the specific revolving body is executed so that the specific symbol can be stopped preferentially.

According to the above configuration, by differentiating the priority of the symbols to be stopped at effective positions for the specific revolving body, it is possible to change the stop result between the first game state and the second game state.

Feature F16. The specific pattern and the predetermined pattern are arranged on the specific rotating body so that if the stop operation means is operated at a timing when the specific pattern can be stopped, the specific pattern can also be stopped. The gaming machine according to feature F15.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the priority between the specific pattern and the predetermined pattern is set so that the predetermined pattern takes priority, even if the operation is performed aiming at the specific pattern, the predetermined pattern can be stopped. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which the second specific symbol combination appears during the first gaming state.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
A first advantageous gaming state (bonus state) and a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state are states that can be entered based on the lottery result by the lottery means and are more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. There are two advantageous gaming states (attack mode, etc.).
a first transition determination means (a function of executing processing for setting a bonus winning flag by the main control device 101) that determines whether a first transition condition for transitioning to the first advantageous gaming state is satisfied;
If the first transition determining means determines that the first transition condition is satisfied, a first transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the first advantageous gaming state (execution of bonus state processing by the main controller 101); function) and
a second transition determination means (a function of executing the first to third specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that determines whether or not a second transition condition for transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state is satisfied;
If the second transition determining means determines that the second transition condition is satisfied, a second transition means (instructing the main controller 101 to perform winning result corresponding processing) shifts the gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state. function) and
In a first specific situation (a situation that is not a carryover state) in which the first transition determining means determines that the first transition condition is not satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means triggers the establishment of the second transition condition. If the specified result is the specified result, the first means (right control by the main controller 101 function to execute reel restriction processing),
In a second specific situation (carryover state) in which the first transition condition is determined to be satisfied by the first transition determining means and before the transition to the first advantageous gaming state by the first transition means , when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a second specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result and different from the first specific symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position; a second means (a function for executing right reel first restriction release processing or right reel second restriction release processing by the main controller 101) for controlling the stop drive of each of the orbiting bodies so that;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, there are a first advantageous gaming state and a second advantageous gaming state as gaming states that can be transitioned to based on the lottery result. Since the game has a plurality of advantageous gaming states, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the lottery results of each game but also in whether or not there is a transition to these plurality of advantageous gaming states. More specifically, in situations where the trigger for transition to one advantageous gaming state and the trigger for transition to another advantageous gaming state overlap, or the conditions for transition to one advantageous gaming state are met, There is a possibility that the result of the lottery will satisfy the conditions for transitioning to another advantageous gaming state, and by chaining and overlapping such advantageous gaming states, it is possible to provide unprecedented fun in playing each game. becomes. Moreover, in the above configuration, when the first transition condition to the first advantageous gaming state is satisfied and the transition to the first advantageous gaming state has not occurred, the player is preparing for the so-called first advantageous gaming state. In a certain second specific situation, if a specific result occurs as a lottery result that triggers the transition to the second advantageous gaming state, a stop roll that is different from the stop roll in the first specific situation in the case where that is not the case. An eye (second specific pattern combination) appears. As a result, the player can clearly grasp that an opportunity to shift to the second advantageous gaming state has occurred while preparing for the first advantageous gaming state, and the It becomes possible to play a game while guessing that an event different from one specific situation will occur.

On the other hand, in a configuration where such advantageous gaming states do not overlap, if an opportunity to transition to one advantageous gaming state occurs and an opportunity to transition to another advantageous gaming state occurs, There is a possibility of a so-called withdrawal loss. In this regard, according to the above configuration, by the appearance of a stop result different from the first specific situation, it becomes possible to clearly understand that the loss has occurred based on the change in the stop result. For example, by compensating for a draw loss through this change in the number of stop results, during the preparation for the first advantageous gaming state, the lottery result that triggers the transition to the second advantageous gaming state can be changed. Even if this happens, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of loss. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and suitably increase the level of attention to the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the first transition condition is set so that it can be satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state.

According to the above configuration, if the first transition condition is satisfied during the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to transfer to the first advantageous gaming state, thereby causing duplication or chaining of both advantageous gaming states. be able to. If the configuration of feature C1 is applied to a gaming machine that assumes such playability, expectations due to the change in the number of stop rolls when a specific result is obtained during preparation for the first advantageous gaming state can be improved. It becomes possible to suitably arouse the feeling.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, wherein the second transition condition is set so that it does not hold in the first advantageous gaming state.

According to the above configuration, the second transition condition is not satisfied even if a specific result is obtained after transitioning to at least the first advantageous gaming state. It may be preferable for the player to obtain a specific result in the first advantageous gaming state compared to obtaining a specific result in the first advantageous gaming state. By making the player aware of such a situation through an event in which the stopped number is changed, it is possible to increase interest in the stopped number.

Feature G4. Features G1 to 1 are characterized in that the first transition determining means is capable of determining whether or not the first transition condition is satisfied based on a lottery result by the lottery means that is different from the specific result. The gaming machine described in any one of G3.

According to the above configuration, the lottery result that triggers the transition to the first advantageous gaming state and the lottery result that triggers the transition to the second advantageous gaming state are different. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in which the player enjoys which advantageous gaming state the player will move to depending on the lottery result, and it is possible to increase interest in the stop result of each orbiting body corresponding to the lottery result.

Feature G5. The benefit granting means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the first specific symbol combination or the second specific symbol combination is stopped at the valid position, a benefit corresponding to the specific result can be granted. ,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a result that can trigger the establishment of the first transition condition, and a third specific symbol combination stops at the valid position, the lottery result corresponds to a result that can trigger the establishment of the first transition condition. It is possible to grant benefits that
At least one of the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination and the third specific pattern combination are each set so that a common pattern combination portion occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4.

According to the above configuration, the game with the lottery result that triggers the transition to the first advantageous gaming state and the game with the lottery result that triggers the transition to the second advantageous gaming state are the same or similar lottery results. It is a stopping roll that gives an impression. Therefore, in a game where these stop rolls have stopped, it is difficult for the player to play the game with the expectation that the game will transition to either or both of the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state. It becomes possible. In particular, even in a configuration where the lottery results that trigger each transition are different, as in feature G4, by using a stop roll that gives the impression that the lottery results are similar as described above, it is possible to prevent overlap of mutually advantageous gaming states. This can provide a sense of expectation that a chain reaction may occur. As a result of the above, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature G6. The third specific pattern combination is set so that the common pattern combination portion occurs with the first specific pattern combination, while the common pattern combination portion occurs with the second specific pattern combination. The gaming machine according to feature G5, characterized in that the gaming machine is set so as not to be played.

According to the above configuration, in the first specific situation, the first transition condition and the second transition condition are given the impression that the opportunities for establishing them are similar, thereby providing a sense of expectation for a chain or duplication of mutually advantageous gaming states. On the other hand, in the second specific situation, by giving the impression that the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established at different times, it is possible to provide a sense of expectation for an event different from the chain or duplication of mutually advantageous gaming states. can.

Feature G7. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result is set in which game media is paid out as a benefit by the benefit granting means,
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal gaming state will be the predetermined payout result is different from the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means in the first advantageous gaming state will be the predetermined payout result. While it is set to get
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal gaming state becomes the predetermined payout result is the same as the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means in the second advantageous gaming state becomes the predetermined payout result. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the gaming machine is set so that

According to the above configuration, the first advantageous gaming state is a state in which the probability of winning a predetermined payout result changes from the normal gaming state. Therefore, the advantage for the player is improved through the payout result and the payout of game media. On the other hand, the second advantageous gaming state is a state in which the probability of winning a predetermined payout result does not change from the normal gaming state. Therefore, since the payout result is different from the payout of game media, the advantage for the player is improved. In this case, as described in feature G1, during preparation for transition to the first advantageous gaming state, if a specific result that triggers transition to the second advantageous gaming state is reached, a second specific symbol combination will appear. In other words, while preparing to transition to the first advantageous gaming state before the probability of a predetermined payout result changes, a specific result that triggers a transition to a second advantageous gaming state where the probability of a predetermined payout result does not change. In this case, whether or not the probability of winning a predetermined payout result changes thereafter can be determined through the appearance of the second specific symbol combination. In other words, when a specific result is obtained in the first specific situation, by making the first specific symbol combination appear, the transition to the second advantageous gaming state becomes advantageous even if the winning probability of the predetermined payout result does not change. In addition, if a specific result is obtained in the second specific situation, by making the second specific symbol combination appear, it is not known whether or not there will be a transition to the second advantageous gaming state. , the user can be made to understand that a transition to a first advantageous gaming state will occur as a result of a subsequent change in the winning probability of a predetermined payout result. In this case, for example, if the number of gaming media paid out during a predetermined period reaches the upper limit, the gaming state may be reset to the initial state, or benefits may be given according to the number of gaming media paid out during a predetermined period or the number of winnings in the payout results. It can be said that there is a great deal of interest in whether or not the probability of a payout result changes in a configuration in which a payout result is given. In this regard, as described above, whether or not the winning probability of the payout result changes can be understood from the stopped number, so it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the stopped number.

Feature G8. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7, wherein the second transition condition is set so that it does not hold in the second specific situation.

According to the above configuration, even if a specific result is obtained in the second specific situation, the second transition condition is not satisfied. Therefore, by making the player aware of this situation through an event in which the stop roll is changed, it is possible to make the player clearly understand that no duplication or chain of advantageous gaming states will occur depending on the current specified result. .

Feature G9. When the second specific symbol combination stops, a specific event (setting value suggestion, point award) that is more advantageous to the player than when the first specific symbol combination stops may occur. The gaming machine described in feature G8.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific symbol combination is stopped due to a specific result in the second specific situation, as a substitute for the second transition condition not being satisfied, the second specific symbol combination is more effective than when the first specific symbol combination is stopped. Certain events may occur that are advantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of loss that there is no overlap or chain of advantageous gaming states.

Feature G10. The second means enables the second specific symbol combination to be stopped when the stop operation means is operated at a timing that enables the second specific symbol combination to be stopped; The gaming machine according to feature G9, characterized in that when the stop operation means is operated at a timing when a specific symbol combination cannot be stopped, the second specific symbol combination cannot be stopped.

According to the above configuration, when the specific result is a win, the second specific symbol combination does not stop unless the eye-pressing operation is successful, and the second specific symbol combination does not stop if the eye-pressing operation fails. Therefore, no specific event occurs. By doing this, even if a situation that could result in a so-called draw loss occurs in the second specific situation, you can enjoy the fun of playing a game that requires you to perform a push operation and having a specific event occur as a result of that game being successful. Through this, it is possible to reduce the sense of loss that there is no duplication or chain of advantageous gaming states.

Feature G11. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result (bell, etc.) in which game media is paid out as a benefit by the benefit granting means is set;
The benefit granting means determines the payout result based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result and the payout symbol combination (bell alignment) corresponding to the payout result has stopped at the valid position. The system pays out the number of gaming media corresponding to
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the payout result is set higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the specific result,
The gaming machine according to feature G8, wherein the second specific symbol combination is the payout symbol combination.

According to the above configuration, when a specific result is obtained in the second specific situation, a stop number (a combination of symbols for payout) that is the same as the payout result that wins with a higher probability than the probability of obtaining the specific result appears. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to realize that the second transition condition is not satisfied even if a specific result is obtained in the second specific situation.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
Specific determination means (a first control unit by the main controller 101 Specific winning combination processing to 3rd specific winning processing)
The degree of advantage in the case where the specific determination means determines that the specific event will occur in a situation where the first setting value (setting 1) is set by the setting means, and the first setting value set by the setting means. is set as the same degree of advantage as the degree of advantage in the case where the specific determination means determines that the specific event will occur in a situation where a different second setting value is set,
Setting value suggestion means (main controller 101 What is claimed is: 1. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing stop information setting processing according to the invention.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by a bonus awarding means if the result corresponds to a lottery result, a specific determination is made as to whether or not a specific event will occur based on the lottery by the lottery means and the lottery results. There may be cases where Therefore, games and processes that cause specific events different from games, such as stopping the orbiting object to obtain a stop result that corresponds to the lottery result by the lottery means, and processes that cause specific events that are different from games, are not allowed to be played or processed by the same lottery means. It becomes possible to play games based on the following, and diversification of games may occur. On the other hand, if specific events are allowed to occur without limit, games based on such specific events will become more important than games in which the main game of a slot machine is to aim at each symbol and perform a stop operation. There is also a reason that it is not desirable because it can become sexual. In this regard, the specific event has the same degree of advantage regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, so it does not affect the increase/decrease rate of gaming media, etc. This is a configuration that is realized by the above-mentioned main game. Furthermore, for games based on specific events, specific situations have been set in which the execution of specific judgments as to whether or not the specific event will occur is restricted, so from this perspective as well, the master-slave relationship of the game is guaranteed. There is. In addition, in a specific situation where restrictions are placed on specific events in which the advantage does not change regardless of the setting value, the setting value for the above-mentioned main game is suggested, so the master-slave relationship between both games is guaranteed. However, the two games can be associated with each other, making it possible to diversify and increase the depth of the games.

It should be noted that "the degree of advantage in the case where it is determined by the specific determining means that the specific event will occur in a situation where the first setting value (setting 1) is set by the setting device and the first setting value (setting 1) by the setting device" The degree of advantage is set to be the same level as the degree of advantage in the case where the specific determination means determines that the specific event will occur in a situation where a second set value different from the set value is set, ``Irrespective of the setting value set by the setting means, the advantage based on the specific event is common'' or ``Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the advantage based on the specific event is the same.'' It may also be expressed as "the degree of advantage does not change."

Feature H2. As the specific event, a special notification (press order notification) corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery unit in a game different from the game that triggered the specific determination is performed by a predetermined notification unit. The gaming machine according to feature H1.

According to the above configuration, the specific event relates to a special notification executed by a predetermined notification means. In this way, there is no need to change the winning probability of each result by the lottery means, and a game related to a specific event can be realized without requiring major changes from the conventional configuration. Moreover, the special notification is supposed to correspond to the lottery result of a lottery means in a game different from the game that triggered the specific determination as to whether or not a specific event will occur, so By associating a plurality of games, such as games with special notifications, it is possible to increase the attention level of the entire game.

Feature H3. As a lottery result by the lottery means, when each of the orbiting bodies stops in a first stop order, a first result becomes a winning prize, and each of the orbiting bodies has a second stop order different from the first stop order. A stop order corresponding result (push order combination) is set that allows a second result different from the first result to be won when the game stops at .
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a result corresponding to the stop order, the special notification means (a function of executing a push order notification process by the display control device 81) is provided that can execute notification regarding the stop order as the special notification. The gaming machine according to feature H2.

According to the above configuration, as a lottery result by the lottery means, a result corresponding to the stop order is set, which can have a different result depending on the stop order of the orbiting body, and a special notification regarding the stop order may be performed by the predetermined notification means. be. Therefore, by making the special notification, it is possible to win different results, thereby realizing a gaming experience. In this case, the player will play the game while expecting a special announcement, and may tend to expect more than the main game, which involves aiming at symbols and stopping the orbiting body to obtain a bonus. In this respect, as described in feature H1, since the master-slave relationship is ensured so as not to place too much emphasis on games related to such stopping order, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature H4. The specific determination means is capable of executing the specific determination based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined trigger result (specific combination),
Any of features H1 to H3, characterized in that the setting value suggestion means is capable of suggesting the setting value based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the trigger result in the specific situation. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to the above configuration, even if a trigger result occurs in a specific situation, instead of restricting execution of specific determination by the specific determination means, it is possible to suggest a setting value. By doing this, we can reduce the feeling of loss that even though we were lucky enough to win, due to the specific situation, we are restricted from making a specific judgment and are unable to cause a specific event. This can be compensated for by setting value suggestions.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the set value suggestion means suggests the set value by stopping a predetermined specific symbol combination at the effective position.

According to the above configuration, the setting value is suggested through the stop result in a specific situation. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention to the stop result in a specific situation, and by suggesting the setting value through the original gameplay of slot machines, such as aiming at each symbol and performing the stop operation, it is possible to increase the attention to the stop result in a specific situation. You can increase your sexuality.

Feature H6. The specific symbol combination is a predetermined lottery result by the lottery means, and the stop operation means is operated to stop a predetermined orbiting body among the orbiting bodies at a first timing. The stop operation means can be stopped at a second timing different from the first timing, and the stop operation means can be stopped at a second timing different from the first timing.
The drive control means is configured to stop a picture combination different from the specific picture combination when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and when the stop operation means is operated to stop at the second timing. Execute stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies so as to
The bonus granting means is configured to grant a bonus corresponding to the specific result when the lottery result by the lottery unit is the specific result and the specific symbol combination is stopped at the valid position, and the lottery result by the lottery unit is The gaming machine according to feature H5, characterized in that even if the lottery result is the specific result, if the different symbol combination stops at the valid position, a benefit corresponding to the specific result is not provided.

According to the above configuration, a specific pattern combination is stopped when the eye pressing operation is successful, and is not stopped when the eye pressing operation is unsuccessful. Therefore, if you want to stop a specific symbol combination and suggest a setting value in a specific situation, if the eye press operation is successful, it will be possible to have the setting value suggested; If this fails, not only the set value will not be suggested, but also what is called a missed offer will occur, making it impossible to obtain the benefits corresponding to the specific result. In this way, it is possible to improve the gameplay by balancing the benefit of setting value suggestion and the risk of missing out, and to enhance the enjoyment when a specific result is achieved in a specific situation.

Feature H7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a special symbol combination different from the specific symbol combination (triple cherry ) is set and
The setting value suggestion means is configured not to suggest the setting value even if the special symbol combination stops;
The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the special symbol combination can be stopped regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the stop operation means if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration that enhances the enjoyment of winning a specific result by the benefit of setting value suggestion and the risk of missing out, the stopping result (special symbol combination) where setting value suggestion is not performed but there is no risk of missing out. By providing this, it is possible to allow the player to choose between a game in which the player is required to suggest a set value while being aware of the risk of losing the game, and a game in which the player is not required to suggest the set value while avoiding the risk of losing the game. For example, a player who does not want to miss out will probably choose the latter game, and if the setting values have already been narrowed down, there is no need to suggest a new setting value, so in this case It is thought that the latter game is also selected. By doing so, it is possible to provide games that meet various needs.

Feature H8. Equipped with a predetermined presentation means (auxiliary display section 65),
The set value suggestion means is characterized in that the set value is suggested by the predetermined presentation means on the condition that at least one picture constituting the specific picture combination has stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of H5 to H7.

According to the above configuration, if the setting value suggestion is performed using a predetermined presentation means, the mode of the setting value suggestion (for example, display content, etc.) can be varied. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the game is performed using only a predetermined presentation means, the game such as aiming at the pattern on the revolving object and stopping it may be neglected. Therefore, a configuration is adopted in which the setting value is suggested on the condition that one of the specific symbol combinations is stopped, that is, on the condition that at least one orbiting object is operated with the aim of aiming at a specific symbol combination. This makes it possible to suggest a set value by associating the stop result with the content of performance by a predetermined performance means, while ensuring the importance of the game of stopping the rotating body by aiming at the pattern.

Feature H9. The setting value suggestion means includes:
means for suggesting a setting value that includes a first number of setting values as the setting value by stopping a first specific symbol combination as the specific symbol combination at the valid position;
A second specific symbol combination different from the first specific symbol combination is stopped at the valid position as the specific symbol combination, and a second number different from the first number is set as the preset value. and the means by which the set value suggestion is carried out,
Equipped with
If the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed at a timing that makes it possible to stop the first specific symbol combination, the second specific symbol combination becomes unstoppable, and the second specific symbol combination becomes stoppable. The gaming machine according to any one of features H5 to H8, wherein the first specific symbol combination becomes unstoppable when the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed at the timing when the stop operation means stops.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which setting value suggestions with different degrees of narrowing down can be made through stop rolls, setting value suggestions with one degree of narrowing down (setting value suggestions including the first number of setting values) may be performed. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the first specific symbol combination, the second specific symbol combination corresponding to the setting value suggestion of the other narrowing degree (setting value suggestion including the second number setting value) is stopped. I can't. By doing so, it is possible to add a game in which the player selects which setting value suggestion should be made.

Feature H10. The first number is set to be greater than the second number,
The gaming machine according to feature H9, wherein the appearance rate of the first specific symbol combination is set to be higher than the appearance rate of the second specific symbol combination.

According to the above configuration, setting value suggestions that are easy to narrow down setting values are less likely to appear than setting value suggestions that are difficult to narrow down setting values. You can choose what to do.

Feature H11. The specific determination means is capable of executing the specific determination based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined trigger result (specific combination),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the trigger result, the benefit granting means grants a benefit corresponding to the trigger result by stopping a predetermined trigger symbol combination at the valid position. can be,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H5 to H10, wherein the specific symbol combination and the opportunity symbol combination are set such that a common symbol combination portion occurs. .

According to the above configuration, the setting value suggestion can be made using a stop result similar to a stop result that becomes a winning result and becomes a trigger for executing a specific determination. By doing this, instead of restricting the execution of specific judgments, it is possible to strengthen the impression that a set value suggestion is being made, so that in a specific situation where specific judgments are restricted, trigger results may be won. Even so, it is possible to reduce the impression of a so-called loss.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result is set in which game media is paid out as a benefit by the benefit granting means,
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined payout result win is different from the normal gaming state in a first specific state (CB state based on the 1st CB to 4th CB) and a second specific state (1st BB, 2nd BB). Based on the bonus status) is set,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result, and the game state is changed to A first transition means for transitioning to the second specific state (a function for executing processing for transitioning to the CB state in bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result, and the game state is changed to a second transition means for transitioning to a second specific state (a function for executing processing for transitioning to a bonus state in bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second transition result, a reservation means (by the main controller 101) for retaining the second transition result until the symbol combination for the second transition stops at the valid position. function to execute the process of step S609);
Equipped with
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result (specific combination in the seventh embodiment) of the first transition result and a predetermined specific result (bell) is set,
If the second transition result is reserved by the reservation means and the duplicate result is won, the specific result is allowed to be won between the first transition result and the specific result; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specifying means (a function of executing lottery processing during a carryover state in the main control device 101) for restricting winning as a result of the first transition.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the rolled number corresponds to a lottery result, a first specific state and a second specific state are set in which the probability of winning a predetermined payout result is different. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win the first transition result or the second transition result, which will trigger the transition to the first specific state or the second specific state. The first transition result may overlap with the specific result and the winning result may be retained, and the second transition result may be reserved even if no prize is won in the winning game. In such a configuration, there is a possibility that an event in which the winning result of the first transition and the winning result of the second transition overlap may occur, and such an event is not preferable from the viewpoint of avoiding an extreme increase in the ball payout rate. On the other hand, if we restrict the possibility of winning a duplicate result in a specific situation where the second transition result is reserved, the probability of a specific result in the specific situation will be correspondingly lower, making it easier to push the button. If an inexperienced player is unable to win a prize as a result of the second transition, a loss of gaming media may occur in certain situations.

On the other hand, if we create a structure that compensates for duplicate results by increasing the probability of other payout results for such specific situations, it will be necessary to prepare a new lottery table, and the amount of stored data will be reduced. This could lead to an increase. Therefore, in the above configuration, in a specific situation where such a second transition result is reserved, a winning result is allowed for the duplicate result of the first transition result and the specific result, and the specific result is determined to be a winning result. The result of the first transition is not considered to be a winning result. As a result, without having to prepare a new lottery table, etc., while avoiding duplicate winnings between the first transition result and the second transition result, it is possible to win a specific result in a specific situation where the second transition result is reserved. It becomes possible to generate

Feature I2. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the benefit granting means is based on the fact that a specific symbol combination (upper bell) different from the first transfer symbol combination has stopped at the valid position. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the gaming machine provides a privilege corresponding to the specific result.

According to the above configuration, the correspondence relationship between each result and the stop number (winning mode) is determined by using the configuration that restricts the first transition result to be won when a duplicate result is won in a specific situation. It is possible to change the number of stop rolls depending on the state while maintaining the same state. In other words, in the configuration of feature E1, if a duplicate result wins in a situation different from the specific situation, it is possible to win for both the specific result and the first transition result, but in a situation different from the specific situation, it is possible to win a prize for both the specific result and the first transition result. It is possible to use the same duplicate results to cause an event in which it is possible to win only a specific result when the result is a winning result. As mentioned above, by differentiating the stop rolls that result in a first transition result winning and the stop rolls that lead to a specific result win, even if the same duplicate result wins, it is possible to In this case, one of the stopping numbers will appear, and in a specific situation, a stopping number corresponding to a specific result winning will appear. By doing this, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the number of stop results is different for each state with a simple configuration.

Feature I3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result winning, the drive control means determines a timing at which the first transfer symbol combination can be stopped, and the specific symbol combination can be stopped. The gaming machine according to feature I2, characterized in that when the stop operation means is operated at a timing, the first transfer symbol combination is controlled to stop at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, when a duplicate result winning is achieved in a situation that is not a specific situation, the first transition result winning is established with priority among the first transition result and the specific result. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game feature in which a first shift result winning is established in a situation other than a specific situation, and a specific result winning is established in a specific situation, with one duplicate result.

Feature I4. A specific determination means (a first control unit by the main controller 101 The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a specific winning combination processing to a third specific winning processing.

According to the above configuration, by stirring up expectations for a specific event, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to winning as a result of duplicates.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to feature I4, further comprising means for restricting execution of the specific determination by the specific determination means in the specific situation (a function for executing the process of step S702 by the main controller 101). .

According to the above configuration, since the execution of the specific determination is restricted in a specific situation, even if the lottery result is a duplicate winning result, the specific determination is not executed and a specific event does not occur. In this case, there will be a difference in whether or not a specific determination is performed when a duplicate result is won depending on whether or not the specific situation is met. In this regard, by expressing such differences by the difference in winning results shown in feature I1, specific judgments can be made through the fact that the first transition result winning is not established in the specific situation (the specific result winning is established). This makes it possible to make the participants understand that this was not done.

Feature I6. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a special result (press order bell) that does not include the first transition result but includes the specific result is set,
According to feature I5, the specific determination means does not perform the specific determination or determines not to cause the specific event when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result winning. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won, a specific judgment is not made or a judgment is made that a specific event does not occur, so from the perspective of the presence or absence of such a specific event, there is overlap between the special result and the specific situation. The result will be the same as at the time of winning. Moreover, a specific result winning can be established in a specific situation when a duplicate result is won, and a specific result winning can also be established in the same way when a special result is won. In this case, it becomes difficult for the player to understand, in a specific situation, whether a specific result winning was achieved based on a duplicate result winning or a specific result winning was achieved based on a special result winning, and a specific event occurs. It becomes unclear whether this is because the execution of specific judgments has been restricted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of loss due to the restriction of the specific judgment even though the player has won as a result of duplicate results in a specific situation.

Feature I7. The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result is higher than the probability that the duplicate result is a winning result.

According to the above configuration, the special result has a higher probability of winning than the duplicate result. Therefore, in the case of a duplicate result winning in a specific situation, the event that the specific result winning is established may give a stronger impression that it is based on the special result winning than the specific result winning. can. This makes it possible to achieve the effect of feature I6 more effectively.

Feature I8. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result winning can be achieved when each of the orbiting bodies stops in a first stop order, and each orbiting body stops in a first stop order different from the first stop order. It includes an order corresponding result (push order replay, push order bell) that allows a second result win different from the first result to be established when the game stops in the stop order of 2,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order-corresponding result, special notification means (notification of the order of pressing) on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display section 65) is capable of giving special notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order of each of the orbiting bodies; (a function of executing press order notification processing by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features I4 to I7, wherein the specific determination means makes a specific determination regarding whether or not the special notification is executed or the number of times the special notification is executed, as the specific event.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the result is an order-based result, the winning result differs depending on the stopping order of the orbiting objects, so it is possible to win the winning result, which is advantageous for the player. . Therefore, it is possible to increase expectations for winning the duplicate result, which is the trigger for specific determination.

Note that it is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of other feature A groups to feature I groups to each structure of feature A group to feature I group detailed above. However, it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

10... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32... Reel as a rotating body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker forming an auxiliary performance section, 65 ... Auxiliary display section forming an auxiliary presentation section, 81... Display control device as a sub-control board, 101... Main control device as a main control board, 102... CPU forming various control means such as lottery means and main control means. .

Claims (1)

a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a stop operation means that stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means for performing a lottery for awarding benefits to players based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result is provided. A means for granting benefits that can be granted;
special determination means for executing a special determination of causing a special event advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result;
in a predetermined specific state, when a lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, a restriction means capable of restricting execution of the special determination by the special determination means;
In the specific state, if the lottery result by the lottery device is the special result, a specific determination means that performs a specific determination to cause a specific event different from the special event;
If the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a result corresponding to causing the specific event, means capable of causing the specific event;
Equipped with
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the specific symbol combination can be stopped regardless of the result of the specific determination by the specific determination device;
A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means is provided for setting one of the plurality of setting values,
The lottery result by the lottery means is configured such that the probability that the lottery result is the special result is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting means,
If the result of the specific determination is a result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event may be caused to occur before the specific state ends. Game machine.

Images